Download Print this page

ABB RELION GRID AUTOMATION REC615 Technical Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for RELION GRID AUTOMATION REC615:

Installation manual (92 pages)

Table Of Contents

page of 1418

/ 1418
Contents Table of Contents
Bookmarks

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual

—

®

RELION

PROTECTION AND CONTROL

GRID AUTOMATION REC615

Technical Manual

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the RELION GRID AUTOMATION REC615 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for ABB RELION GRID AUTOMATION REC615

Page 1 — ® RELION PROTECTION AND CONTROL GRID AUTOMATION REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 3 Document ID: 2NGA002468 A Issued: 2025-05-09 Revision: A © Copyright 2025 ABB. All rights reserved...
Page 4 Copyright ABB is the owner of the copyright in this document. This document or any parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without the written permission from ABB and the contents thereof must not be used to any unauthorized purpose.
Page 5 Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Page 6 Conformity This product complies with following directive and regulations. Directives of the European parliament and of the council: • Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Directive 2014/30/EU • Low-voltage Directive 2014/35/EU • RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU • RoHS Directive (EU) 2015/863 amending Annex II UK legislations: •...
Page 7: Table Of Contents
Contents Contents Introduction..................... 25 This manual............................25 Intended audience..........................25 Product documentation........................26 1.3.1 Product documentation set....................26 1.3.2 Document revision history....................26 1.3.3 Related documentation....................... 26 Symbols and conventions........................27 1.4.1 Symbols........................... 27 1.4.2 Document conventions......................27 1.4.3 Functions, codes and symbols................... 29 REC615 overview..................
Page 8 Contents 3.1.9 IEC 101-104 General settings....................54 3.1.10 IEC 101-104 Secure settings....................55 3.1.11 IEC 101-104 Secure statistics thresholds settings............56 3.1.12 IEC 101-104 Monitored data....................57 3.1.13 IEC 101-104 Secure monitored data................... 57 3.1.14 IEC 61850-8-1 MMS settings....................58 3.1.15 Modbus settings........................
Page 9 Contents 3.5.3 Signals........................... 105 3.5.4 Settings..........................106 3.5.5 ALARM LED Monitored data....................108 Time synchronization......................... 109 3.6.1 Time master supervision GNRLLTMS................109 Generic protection control PROTECTION..................118 3.7.1 PROTECTION Function block.....................118 3.7.2 Functionality......................... 118 3.7.3 PROTECTION Signals......................121 3.7.4 PROTECTION Settings......................122 Local/Remote control CONTROL......................122 3.8.1 CONTROL Function block....................122...
Page 10 Contents 3.16 RTD/mA inputs.............................170 3.16.1 Functionality......................... 170 3.16.2 Operation principle......................170 3.16.3 Signals............................181 3.16.4 Settings..........................183 3.16.5 RTD/mA monitored data....................184 3.17 SMV function blocks........................... 186 3.17.1 SMV stream sender (IEC 61850-9-2LE) SMVSENDER........... 186 3.17.2 SMV stream receiver (IEC 61850-9-2LE) SMVRCV............188 3.18 GOOSE function blocks........................188 3.18.1...
Page 11 Contents 3.20.7 SR flip-flop, eight channels, nonvolatile SRGAPC (ANSI SR)........233 3.20.8 Boolean value event creation MVGAPC (ANSI MV)............235 3.20.9 Integer value event creation MVI4GAPC (ANSI MVI4)........... 237 3.20.10 Analog value event creation with scaling SCA4GAPC (ANSI SCA4)......238 3.20.11 16 settable real values SETRGAPC................... 240 3.20.12 16 settable 32-bit integer values SETI32GAPC..............
Page 12 Contents 3.24.3 LDPRLRC Functionality...................... 294 3.24.4 LDPRLRC Configuration..................... 297 3.24.5 Signals...........................298 3.24.6 LDPRLRC Settings.......................298 3.24.7 LDPRLRC Monitored data....................298 3.25 Ethernet channel supervision functions..................299 3.25.1 Redundant Ethernet channel supervision RCHLCCH...........299 3.25.2 Ethernet channel supervision SCHLCCH................ 301 3.26 Modbus Master function blocks...................... 304 3.26.1 Received Modbus binary information function block MMVGAPC......
Page 13 Contents 4.2.10 Multifrequency admittance-based earth-fault protection MFADPSDE (ANSI 67NYH)..........................561 4.2.11 Directional fault pass indicator FPIPTOC (ANSI 67NFPI)..........591 4.2.12 Touch voltage based earth-fault current protection IFPTOC (ANSI 46SNQ/59N). 599 Unbalance protection.........................663 4.3.1 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection NSPTOC (ANSI 46)........ 663 4.3.2 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection XNSPTOC (ANSI 46)......669 4.3.3...
Page 14 Contents 5.2.4 CCBRBRF Analog channel configuration.................787 5.2.5 CCBRBRF Operation principle...................787 5.2.6 CCBRBRF Application......................795 5.2.7 Signals........................... 796 5.2.8 CCBRBRF Settings.......................797 5.2.9 CCBRBRF Monitored data....................798 5.2.10 CCBRBRF Technical data ....................798 5.2.11 CCBRBRF Technical revision history................798 Circuit breaker failure protection 1ph/3ph SCCBRBRF (ANSI 50BF).........798 5.3.1 SCCBRBRF Identification....................
Page 15 Contents 5.6.4 PHIZ Analog channel configuration.................825 5.6.5 PHIZ Operation principle....................825 5.6.6 PHIZ Application........................829 5.6.7 Signals...........................830 5.6.8 PHIZ Settings........................831 5.6.9 PHIZ Monitored data......................832 5.6.10 PHIZ Technical revision history..................832 Fault locator SCEFRFLO (ANSI FLOC)....................833 5.7.1 SCEFRFLO Identification....................833 5.7.2 SCEFRFLO Function block....................
Page 16 Contents 5.10.1 DNZSRDIR Identification....................875 5.10.2 DNZSRDIR Function block....................875 5.10.3 DNZSRDIR Functionality....................875 5.10.4 DNZSRDIR Analog channel configuration..............875 5.10.5 DNZSRDIR Operation principle..................876 5.10.6 DNZSRDIR Application....................... 881 5.10.7 Signals........................... 881 5.10.8 DNZSRDIR Settings......................882 5.10.9 DNZSRDIR Monitored data....................883 5.10.10 DNZSRDIR Technical revision history................883 5.11 Multipurpose protection MAPGAPC (ANSI MAP)................
Page 17 Contents 6.2.11 SEQSPVC Technical revision history................904 Runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT (ANSI OPTM)........906 6.3.1 MDSOPT Identification......................906 6.3.2 MDSOPT Function block....................906 6.3.3 MDSOPT Functionality.......................906 6.3.4 MDSOPT Operation principle................... 906 6.3.5 MDSOPT Application......................907 6.3.6 Signals..........................908 6.3.7 MDSOPT Settings.......................
Page 18 Contents 7.1.8 SSCBR Settings........................936 7.1.9 SSCBR Monitored data.......................938 7.1.10 SSCBR Technical data ......................938 7.1.11 SSCBR Technical revision history..................938 Circuit-breaker condition monitoring, single phase SPSCBR (ANSI 52CM)......939 7.2.1 SPSCBR Identification......................939 7.2.2 SPSCBR Function block......................939 7.2.3 SPSCBR Functionality......................939 7.2.4 SPSCBR Operation principle.....................940 7.2.5 SPSCBR Application......................950 7.2.6...
Page 19 Contents 8.3.3 A1RADR Settings........................1033 Disturbance recorder, binary channels 1...64 B1RBDR and B2RBDR........1034 8.4.1 B1RBDR and B2RBDR Function block................1034 8.4.2 B1RBDR and B2RBDR Signals..................1035 8.4.3 B1RBDR and B2RBDR Settings..................1036 Control functions.................1037 Circuit breaker control CBXCBR and Disconnector control DCXSWI (ANSI 52, 29DS)..1037 9.1.1 CBXCBR and DCXSWI Identification................
Page 20 Contents 9.4.5 SECRSYN Operation principle..................1065 9.4.6 SECRSYN Application......................1072 9.4.7 Signals..........................1074 9.4.8 SECRSYN Settings......................1075 9.4.9 SECRSYN Monitored data....................1076 9.4.10 SECRSYN Technical data ....................1077 9.4.11 SERCRSYN Technical revision history................1077 Autoreclosing DARREC (ANSI 79) ....................1077 9.5.1 DARREC Identification...................... 1077 9.5.2 DARREC Function block....................1077 9.5.3 DARREC Functionality.......................1078...
Page 21 Contents 9.8.6 ATSABTC Signals........................1188 9.8.7 ATSABTC Settings......................1189 9.8.8 ATSABTC Monitored data....................1189 9.8.9 ATSABTC Technical data ....................1190 Loop control RLCM (ANSI RLCM)....................1190 9.9.1 RLCM Identification......................1190 9.9.2 RLCM Function block......................1190 9.9.3 RLCM Functionality......................1190 9.9.4 RLCM Operation principle....................1192 9.9.5 RLCM Application.......................1197 9.9.6...
Page 22 Contents 10.3.3 PHQVVR Functionality...................... 1234 10.3.4 PHQVVR Analog channel configuration................ 1234 10.3.5 PHQVVR Operation principle..................1235 10.3.6 PHQVVR Recorded data....................1243 10.3.7 PHQVVR Application......................1245 10.3.8 Signals..........................1247 10.3.9 PHQVVR Settings.......................1247 10.3.10 PHQVVR Monitored data....................1249 10.3.11 PHQVVR Technical data ....................1251 10.3.12 PHQVVR Technical revision history................1252 10.4 Voltage unbalance VSQVUB (ANSI PQMV UB)................
Page 23 Contents 11.8.6 LHMI indications........................ 1361 Requirements for measurement transformers........1362 12.1 Current transformers........................1362 12.1.1 Current transformer requirements for overcurrent protection....... 1362 Protection relay's physical connections........... 1366 13.1 Module slot numbering........................1366 13.2 Protective earth connections ......................1367 13.3 Module diagrams..........................1368 13.4 Communication connections......................
Page 24 Contents 15.4 Environmental tests.......................... 1412 16 Applicable standards and regulations..........1413 Glossary....................1414 REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 25: Introduction
2NGA002468 A Introduction Introduction This manual The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
Page 26: Product Documentation
Introduction 2NGA002468 A Product documentation 1.3.1 Product documentation set Quick installation guide Brochure Product guide Operation manual Installation manual Engineering manual Technical manual Application manual Communication protocol manual IEC 61850 engineering guide Cyber security deployment guideline Hardware modification instructions Modification sales guideline End of Life Instructions Figure 1: The intended use of documents during the product life cycle 1.3.2...
Page 27: Symbols And Conventions
2NGA002468 A Introduction ABB Technical documentation Download the latest documents from the portal Symbols and conventions 1.4.1 Symbols The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in electrical shock. The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in personal injury.
Page 28 Introduction 2NGA002468 A • Values of quantities are expressed with a number and an SI unit. The corresponding imperial units may be given in parentheses. • This document assumes that the parameter setting visibility is "Advanced". • Protective earthing is indicated in figures with the symbol REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 29: Functions, Codes And Symbols
2NGA002468 A Introduction 1.4.3 Functions, codes and symbols Table 1: Functions included in the relay Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Protection Switch-onto-fault protection CVPSOF CVPSOF SOTF Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, low PHLPTOC 3I> 51P-1 stage Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection with 1- SPHLPTOC 3I>...
Page 30 Introduction 2NGA002468 A Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Multifrequency admittance-based earth-fault protection MFADPSDE Io> -> Y 67NYH Wattmetric-based earth-fault protection WPWDE Po> -> Transient/intermittent earth-fault protection INTRPTEF Io> -> IEF 67NTEF/NIEF Harmonics-based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC Io>HA 51NH Directional fault pass indicator FPIPTOC Io>->FP 67NFPI...
Page 31 2NGA002468 A Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Disconnector control DCXSWI I <-> O DCC 29DS Disconnector position indication DCSXSWI I <-> O DC 29DS Earthing switch position indication ESSXSWI I <-> O ES 29GS Autoreclosing DARREC O -> I Autoreclosing, 1- or 3-phase, Single phase recloser SPRREC O ->...
Page 32 Introduction 2NGA002468 A Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Voltage unbalance VSQVUB PQUUB PQMV UB Traditional LED indication LED indication control LEDPTRC LEDPTRC LEDPTRC Individual programmable LED control Logging functions Disturbance recorder (common functionality) RDRE Disturbance recorder, analog channels 1...12 A1RADR A1RADR A1RADR...
Page 33 2NGA002468 A Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Real minimum value selector MIN3R MIN3R MIN3R Rising edge detector R_TRIG R_TRIG R_TRIG Falling edge detector F_TRIG F_TRIG F_TRIG Real switch selector SWITCHR SWITCHR SWITCHR Integer 32-bit switch selector SWITCHI32 SWITCHI32 SWITCHI32 SR flip-flop, volatile RS flip-flop, volatile...
Page 34 Introduction 2NGA002468 A Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Voltage switch VMSWI VSWI VSWI Current sum CMSUM CSUM CSUM Current switch CMSWI CMSWI CMSWI Phase current preprocessing ILTCTR ILTCTR ILTCTR Residual current preprocessing RESTCTR RESTCTR RESTCTR Phase and residual voltage preprocessing UTVTR UTVTR UTVTR...
Page 35 2NGA002468 A Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI 16 settable 32-bit integer values SETI32GAPC SETI32GAPC SETI32GAPC 16 settable real values SETRGAPC SETRGAPC SETRGAPC Boolean to integer 32-bit conversion T_B16_TO_I32 T_B16_TO_I32 T_B16_TO_I32 Integer 32-bit to boolean conversion T_I32_TO_B16 T_I32_TO_B16 T_I32_TO_B16 Integer 32-bit to real conversion T_I32_TO_R T_I32_TO_R...
Page 36: Rec615 Overview
– from tailoring to adapting to changing and new application-specific requirements. REC615 represents the next step for ABB’s REC615, RER615 and RER620 relays in terms of technological innovation, flexibility, cost-effectiveness and ®...
Page 37: Relay Hardware
2NGA002468 A REC615 overview Relay hardware REC615 has modular hardware with a withdrawable plug-in unit design assisting relay installation, testing and maintenance. REC615 offers two different relay size variants: standard and wide. Relay size variant and module content can be selected according to application needs.
Page 38 REC615 overview 2NGA002468 A Housing X115 X120 X130 Only available with wide housing options Optional X000 X120 X100 X130 X110 Figure 2: Module slot numbering for standard housing REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 39 2NGA002468 A REC615 overview X000 X115 X100 X120 X105 X130 X110 Figure 3: Module slot numbering for wide housing Table 4: Module descriptions Module Description COM1 RJ45 COM11 RJ45 + RS-485/IRIG-B COM12 LC + RS-485/IRIG-B COM27 RJ45 + RS 232/485 +RS-485/IRIG-B + Glassfibre ST COM31 3RJ45 COM37...
Page 40: Local Hmi
REC615 overview 2NGA002468 A Module Description BIO7 8BI + 3HSO AIM3 5U + 2RTD + 1mA AIM5 7CT (Io 1/5A) AIM6 5VT + 4BI AIM7 6VT + 3BI AIM13 4CT (Io 0.2/1A) + 3TV AIM17 4CT (Io 0.2/1A) + 4BI RTD3 6RTD + 2mA (in) SIM1...
Page 41 2NGA002468 A REC615 overview Figure 4: Standard size LHMI 2.3.1.1 Keypad The LHMI keypad contains push buttons which are used to navigate in different views or menus. With the push buttons you can give open or close commands to objects in the primary circuit, for example, a circuit breaker, a contactor or a disconnector.
Page 42: Local Hmi Wide Size
REC615 overview 2NGA002468 A Programmable push buttons with LEDs Figure 6: Programmable push buttons with LEDs The LHMI keypad on the left side of the protection relay contains 4 programmable push buttons with red LEDs. The buttons and LEDs are freely programmable, and they can be configured both for operation and acknowledgement purposes.
Page 43 2NGA002468 A REC615 overview Figure 7: Wide size LHMI 2.3.2.1 Keypad The LHMI keypad contains push buttons which are used to navigate in different views or menus. With the push buttons you can give open or close commands to objects in the primary circuit, for example, a circuit breaker, a contactor or a disconnector.
Page 44: Display
REC615 overview 2NGA002468 A Programmable push buttons with LEDs Figure 9: Programmable push buttons with LEDs The LHMI keypad on the left side of the protection relay contains 16 programmable push buttons with red LEDs. The buttons and LEDs are freely programmable, and they can be configured both for operation and acknowledgement purposes.
Page 45: Leds
2NGA002468 A REC615 overview Table 6: Display Character size Rows in the view Characters per row Small, mono-spaced (6 × 12 pixels) Large, variable width (13 × 14 pixels) 8 or more The display view is divided into four basic areas. Header Content Icon...
Page 46 REC615 overview 2NGA002468 A Figure 11: Example view of the Web HMI WHMI offers several functions. The menu tree structure on the WHMI is almost identical to the one on the LHMI. Table 7: Web HMI main groups and submenus Main groups Submenus Description...
Page 47: User Authorization
2NGA002468 A REC615 overview Main groups Submenus Description Import/Export Set- tings Parameter List Parameters Used to view the menu tree structure for the protection relay's setting parameters Language selection Used to change the language Logout Used to end the session The WHMI can be accessed locally and remotely.
Page 48: Central Account Management
REC615 overview 2NGA002468 A 2.5.2 Central account management The user accounts and roles can be created and authenticated centrally in a CAM server. CAM needs to be activated in the protection relay from Account Management in PCM600. A CAM server can be an Active Directory (AD) server such as Windows AD. There can also be a secondary or redundant CAM server configured which can act as a backup CAM server if the primary CAM server is not accessible.
Page 49 If it is needed to use the possibilities provided by the Modification Sales concept, please contact your local ABB unit. REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 50: Basic Functions
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Basic functions General parameters 3.1.1 Authorization settings Table 8: Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Remote Update 0=Disable Remote update 0=Disable 1=Enable Remote override 1=True Disable authority 0=False 1=True Local override 1=True Disable authority 0=False 1=True...
Page 51: Binary Input Settings
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.1.2 Binary input settings Table 9: Binary input settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Input threshold voltage 16...176 Global binary input threshold for all slots Input threshold hysteresis 10...50 Global binary input hysteresis for all slots Input osc.
Page 52: System Settings
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 12: Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IP address 192.168.0.254 IP address for front port Mac address XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX Mac address for front port 3.1.6 System settings Table 13: Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 53: Hmi Control Settings
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 2=Main menu 3=SLD Backlight timeout 1...60 LHMI backlight timeout Web HMI mode 0=Off Web HMI function- 0=Off ality 1=On Web HMI timeout 1...60 Web HMI login timeout SLD symbol format 1=IEC 1=IEC Single Line Dia- gram symbol for-...
Page 54: Iec 101-104 General Settings
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values Unit Step Default Description tors and earthing switches from HMI Close delay 5…900 Operation delay for Close delay mode Breaker oper- 0=After confir- Enable or disable 0=After confirmation ation mation confirmation dialog 1=Without confirma- before operating cir- tion cuit breakers, discon-...
Page 55: Iec 101-104 Secure Settings
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Time Zone 1=UTC Selects between 0=Local UTC/Local time 1=UTC Overflow Mode 0=Oldest+indica- Event buffer over- 0=Oldest+indica- tion flow handling tion mechanism 1=Keep newest OvInd IOA 0...16777215 60000 Overflow indication address for interro- gated data OvInd NoGI IOA...
Page 56: Iec 101-104 Secure Statistics Thresholds Settings
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 17: Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Protocol Security 0=Off Protocol Security 1=App. authentica- Mode Mode - 0: Off; 1: tion Aplication authenti- 2=TLS and appl. cation; 2: TLS and auth. Aplication authenti- cation 0=Off...
Page 57: Iec 101-104 Monitored Data
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Error Msgs Tx 1...65535 Security statistics threshold error messages sent Error Msgs Rx 1...65535 Security statistics threshold error messages received Successful Authn 1...65535 Security statistics threshold for suc- cessful authentica- tions Sesn key Chg 1...65535...
Page 58: Iec 61850-8-1 Mms Settings
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 20: Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Unexp Msgs Cnt INT32 0...2147483646 Security statistics coun- ter for unexpected mes- sages Auth Fail Cnt INT32 0...2147483646 Security statistics coun- ter for authorization failures Authn Fail Cnt INT32 0...2147483646 Security statistics coun-...
Page 59: Modbus Settings
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tion/Proto- cols/ 1=On Network2/MMS Configura- 1=On MMS communica- 0=Off tion/Communica- tion mode 1=On tion/Proto- cols/HMI Port/MMS 3.1.15 Modbus settings Table 22: Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation...
Page 60: Modbus Monitored Data
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Event ID selection 0=Address Selects whether the 0=Address events are reported 1=UID using the MB ad- dress or the UID number. Event buffering 0=Keep oldest Selects whether the 0=Keep oldest oldest or newest 1=Keep newest events are kept in...
Page 61: Modbus Master Settings
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.1.16 MODBUS Monitored data Table 23: Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Customization Mode Enum Protocol Customization 0=Off/Normal Mode 1=By Parameter 2=By File Reset counters BOOLEAN Reset counters 0=False 1=True Received frames INT32 -1...2147483646 Number of received frames Transmitted frames...
Page 62: Modbus Master Monitored Data
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ped byte order for 1=Lo-Hi checksum for seri- al connection. De- fault: Hi-Lo. Rx Timeout 20...60000 1000 Receive timeout Max. Retry Count 0...10 Maximum retry count Recheck timeout 5...10800 Recheck timeout for unresponsive slaves...
Page 63 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Mapping select 1...2 Mapping select ClientIP 0.0.0.0 IP address of client TCP port 20000...65535 20000 TCP Port used on ethernet communi- cation UDP Rx Port 1...65535 20000 UDP Port for ac- cepting data from client/master UDP Tx Port Ini...
Page 64 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description UR retry delay 0...65535 5000 Additional delay kept after App/UR confirm TO before sending new unso- licited retry UR offline interval 0...65535 Unsolicited offline interval UR Class 1 Min 0...999 Min number of events...
Page 65 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Default Var Obj 22 6=6:16bit Cnt 1=32 bit counter 1=1:32bit Cnt evt evt&time event; 2=16 bit 2=2:16bit Cnt evt counter event; 5=32 bit counter event 5=5:32bit Cnt with time; 6=16 bit evt&time counter event with time.
Page 66: Dnp 3.0 Secure Settings
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.1.20 DNP 3.0 Secure settings Table 27: Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Protocol Security 0=Off Protocol Security 1=App. authentica- Mode Mode - 0: Off; 1: tion Aplication authenti- 2=TLS and appl. cation;...
Page 67: Dnp 3.0 Monitored Data
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Table 28: Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Unexpected Msgs 1...65535 Security statistics threshold for unex- pected messages Auth failures 1...65535 Security statistics threshold for au- thorization failures Authn failures 1...65535 Security statistics threshold for au- thentication fail- ures...
Page 68: Dnp 3.0 Secure Monitored Data
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description 1=True Customization Enum Protocol Customization Mode 0=Off/Normal Mode 1=By Parameter 2=By File Reset counters BOOLEAN Reset counters 0=False 1=True Received frames INT32 -1...2147483646 Received frames Transmitted INT32 -1...2147483646 Transmitted frames frames Physical errors INT32...
Page 69: Serial Communication Driver Com1 Settings
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Successful Authn Cnt INT32 0...2147483646 Security statistics coun- ter for successful au- thentications Session Key Chg Cnt INT32 0...2147483646 Security statistics coun- ter for session key changes Fail Ses Key Chg Cnt INT32 0...2147483646 Security statistics coun-...
Page 70: Serial Communication Com2 Settings
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 32: Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Characters received INT32 -1...2147483646 Characters received Frames received INT32 -1...2147483646 Number of successfully received frames Frames discarded INT32 -1...2147483646 Number of discarded frames Frames transmitted INT32 -1...2147483646 Number of transmitted frames...
Page 71: Serial Communication Com2 Monitored Data
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.1.27 Serial Communication COM2 Monitored data Table 34: Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Characters received INT32 -1...2147483646 Characters received Frames received INT32 -1...2147483646 Number of successfully received frames Frames discarded INT32 -1...2147483646 Number of discarded frames Frames transmitted INT32...
Page 72: Self-Healing Ethernet Ring
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A through these protocols. However, some communication functionality, for example, horizontal communication between the protection relays, is only enabled by the IEC 61850 communication protocol. One full IEC 61850-9-2 LE stream containing both voltages and currents can be sent.
Page 73: Ethernet Redundancy
2NGA002468 A Basic functions for port priority). This ensures that most of the network traffic that is not meant for the relays flows between the Ethernet switches. The self-healing ring solution supports the connection of up to 30 protection relays. However, the HSR or PRP network is recommended to ensure redundant and proper functionality.
Page 74 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A LAN A LAN A LAN B LAN B Figure 12: Parallel redundancy protocol solution In case a laptop or a PC workstation is connected as a non-PRP node to one of the PRP networks, LAN A or LAN B, it is recommended to use a redundancy box device or an Ethernet switch with similar functionality between the PRP network and SAN to remove additional PRP information from the Ethernet frames.
Page 75: Process Bus
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Redundancy Redundancy Redundancy Redundancy Redundancy Redundancy Figure 13: High-availability seamless redundancy solution 3.2.2.1 Interlink port In the relay redundant COM module, the port without LAN-A/LAN-B tag is so called interlink-port. This port can be used to connect a device directly to the relay. Mainly this port should be used to connect a single point-to-point device, such as RIO600.
Page 76 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A is automatically supervised. Additional contribution to the higher availability is the possibility to use redundant Ethernet network for transmitting SMV signals. Common Ethernet Station bus (IEC 61850-8-1), process bus (IEC 61850-9-2 LE) and IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization Figure 14: Process bus application of voltage sharing and synchrocheck REC615 supports IEC 61850 process bus with sampled values of analog currents and voltages.
Page 77: Secure Communication
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Primary Secondary IEEE 1588 v2 IEEE 1588 v2 master clock master clock (optional) Managed HSR Managed HSR Ethernet Ethernet switch switch IEC 61850 Backup 1588 master clock Figure 15: Example network topology with process bus, redundancy and IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization 3.2.4 Secure communication...
Page 78 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 36: Secondary IP address parameters Parameter Options Description Configuration/Communica- False (default) Network 2 disabled tion/Ethernet/Network 2 ad- dress/ Enable TRUE Network 2 enabled Configuration/Communica- 0.0.0.0 IP address for Network 2 tion/Ethernet/Network 2 ad- dress/IP address Configuration/Communica- 0.0.0.0 Subnet address for Network 2...
Page 79 2NGA002468 A Basic functions COM0001 RJ-45 Network 1 Network 1 / Network 2 Figure 16: Ethernet modes with Network 1 and Network 2 REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 80: Protocol Control
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A If the protocol does not operate as expected, check that other serial protocols are not using the COM port. Inserting the RS232 cable should be done with the IED powered off. Use the correct Ethernet connectors in the protection relay with redundant communication protocols like HSR and PRP.
Page 81 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Parameter Options Description Configuration/Communication/Proto- Denies IEC 61850 MMS cols/Network2/MMS On (Default) Allows IEC 61850 MMS Configuration/Communication/Proto- Denies IEC 61850 MMS cols/HMI Port/MMS On (Default) Allows IEC 61850 MMS Configuration/Communication/Proto- Denies DNP3 cols/Network1/DNP On (Default) Allows DNP3 Configuration/Communication/Proto- Denies DNP3 cols/Network2/DNP...
Page 82: Goose Supervision Gselprt1
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Options Description Configuration/Authorization/Net- IEC 61850 MMS write access work2/MMS write access denied for Network 2 On (Default) IEC 61850 MMS write access allowed for Network 2 Configuration/Authorization/Net- HTTPS write access denied work2/HTTPS write access for Network 2 On (Default) HTTPS write access allowed for Network 2...
Page 83: Serial Port Supervision Serlcch
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.2.7 Serial port supervision SERLCCH 3.2.7.1 SERLCCH Function block Figure 18: SERLCCH Function block 3.2.7.2 SERLCCH Functionality The serial port supervision function SERLCCH represents one serial communication port driver. Depending on the hardware configuration, the protection relay can be equipped with two UART-based serial communication ports.
Page 84: Modbus Protocol Mbslprt
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Depending on the communication protocol, the serial driver software receives single characters or complete protocol frames, based on the frame start/stop characters or on link frame timing. Whenever using optical fiber cables in the COM2 port, do the selection with the required jumpers in the communication card and select the fiber mode accordingly in PCM/HMI >...
Page 85: Modbus Master Protocol Mbmlprt
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.2.10 Modbus protocol MBSLPRT 3.2.10.1 MBSLPRT Function block Figure 19: MBSLPRT Function block 3.2.10.2 MBSLPRT Functionality The function block represents a Modbus server protocol instance in the protection relay. Function block settings include communication interface assignment for the instance, that is, Ethernet/TCP or serial.
Page 86: Dnp3 Protocol Dnplprt
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A A Modbus Master protocol instance is activated if the function block instance is Operation should be “On” and added to the application configuration. The setting Port should have a communication interface assigned. setting The STATUS output of the function block is active if the there is at least one slave unit connected in the bus which is replying to the master.
Page 87: Iec 60870-5-101/104 Protocol I5Clprt
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.2.13 IEC 60870-5-101/104 protocol I5CLPRT 3.2.13.1 I5CLPRT Function block Figure 22: I5CLPRT Function block 3.2.13.2 I5CLPRT Functionality The function block represents one IEC 60870-5-101/104 TCP/IP server protocol instance in the protection relay. An IEC 60870-5-101/104 server protocol instance is activated if the function block Operation should be instance is added to the application configuration.
Page 88: Internal Faults
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A The security is increased by preventing the relay from making false decisions, such as issuing false control commands. There are two types of fault indications. • Internal faults • Warnings 3.3.1 Internal faults When an internal relay fault is detected, the relay protection operation is disabled, the green Ready LED begins to flash and the self-supervision output relay is de- energized, i.e.
Page 89 Figure 23: Output contact The internal fault code indicates the type of internal relay fault. When a fault appears, the code must be recorded so that it can be reported to ABB customer service. Table 41: Internal fault indications and codes...
Page 90 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Fault indication Fault Additional Fast self- Slow 10 Immediate Action in permanent fault state code information recovery min self- permanen attempt recovery t IRF- (# of (# of mode attempts) attempts) Internal Fault Start up error or Yes (2) Yes (3) Restart the relay.
Page 91 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Fault indication Fault Additional Fast self- Slow 10 Immediate Action in permanent fault state code information recovery min self- permanen attempt recovery t IRF- (# of (# of mode attempts) attempts) Internal Fault Runtime error: Faul- Yes (2) Yes (3) Check wirings.
Page 92 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Fault indication Fault Additional Fast self- Slow 10 Immediate Action in permanent fault state code information recovery min self- permanen attempt recovery t IRF- (# of (# of mode attempts) attempts) Internal Fault Start up error: Card Check that the card in slot X110 is prop- Conf.
Page 93 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Fault indication Fault Additional Fast self- Slow 10 Immediate Action in permanent fault state code information recovery min self- permanen attempt recovery t IRF- (# of (# of mode attempts) attempts) lay, most probably hardware failure in CPU module.
Page 94: Warnings
LHMI. The warning indication message can be manually cleared. If a warning appears, record the name and code so that it can be provided to ABB customer service. Table 42: Warning indications and codes Warning indication Warning code Additional information An internal system error has occurred.
Page 95 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Warning indication Warning code Additional information SMT logic error Error in the GOOSE connections. Warning GOOSE input error Error in the ACT connections. ACT error Error in the GOOSE message receiving. Warning GOOSE Rx. error Analog channel configuration or settings er- Warning ror.
Page 96: Fail-Safe Principle For Relay Protection
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A For further information on warning indications, see the operation manual. 3.3.3 Fail-safe principle for relay protection The relay behavior during an internal fault situation has to be considered when engineering trip circuits under the fail-safe principle. The considerations discussed and examples given are mainly based on the need of protection scheme reliability.
Page 97 2NGA002468 A Basic functions In example 1, the fail-safe approach aims at securing motor shutdown via an emergency switch and in case the control voltage disappears. In case of a temporary internal relay fault, the circuit breaker is immediately tripped before the relay recovers from the situation.
Page 98 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Protection relay Emergency stop Circuit breaker (CB) Protection relay trip output Internal relay fault indication <U CB undervoltage trip coil CB trip coil 1 OFF delay time relay Miniature circuit breaker In example 3, the fail-safe approach aims at securing motor shutdown via an emergency switch and in case the control voltage disappears.
Page 99 2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.3.3.2 Other critical feeders The examples given for motor feeders can be applied for other types of feeders as well. The following examples are for critical feeders in which the protection system dependability, security or both are the drivers. Control + Control + +J01...
Page 100 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Control + Control + +J01 +J02 +J02-F1 control + +J01-F1 control + +J02 -A1 +J01 -A1 -TO2 -TO2 -TO1 -TO1 AUX. POWER AUX. POWER +J02-F1 control - +J01-F1 control - Control - Control - Figure 29: Redundant protection fail-safe principle, example 2 Feeder #1 panel Feeder #2 panel Circuit breaker (CB)
Page 101 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Circuit breaker (CB) Protection relay #1 Protection relay #2 Protection relay trip output CB trip coil 1 CB trip coil 2 Miniature circuit breaker In example 3, the fail-safe approach aims at securing circuit breaker tripping even if one of the redundant relays fails.
Page 102: Led Indication Control Ledptrc
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A protection functions. This principle is used in cases where the primary process requires absolute dependability and security from the supplying feeder protection. LED indication control LEDPTRC 3.4.1 LEDPTRC Function block Figure 32: LEDPTRC Function block 3.4.2 LEDPTRC Functionality The protection relay includes a global conditioning function LEDPTRC that is used to control the virtual Start and Trip indication LEDs.
Page 103: Led Functionality
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.5.1 LED Function block Figure 33: LED Function block 3.5.2 LED Functionality The programmable LEDs reside on the right side of the display on the LHMI. Figure 34: Programmable LEDs on the right side of the display All the programmable LEDs in the HMI of the protection relay have two colours, green and red.
Page 104 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Each LED is seen in the Application Configuration tool as an individual function block. Each LED has user-editable description text for event description. The state ("None", "OK", "Alarm") of each LED can also be read under a common monitored data view for programmable LEDs.
Page 105: Signals
2NGA002468 A Basic functions "Follow-F": Follow Signal, Flashing Similar to "Follow-S", but instead the LED is flashing when the input is active, Non- latched. "Latched-S": Latched, ON This mode is a latched function. At the activation of the input signal, the alarm shows a steady light.
Page 106: Settings
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Default Description RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 1 BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 2 ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 2 RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 2 BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 3 ALARM...
Page 107 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Table 44: Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Alarm colour 2=Red Colour for the 1=Green alarm state of the 2=Red Alarm mode 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for 0=Follow-S programmable LED 1=Follow-F 2=Latched-S 3=LatchedAck-F-S Description Programmable Programmable LED...
Page 108: Alarm Led Monitored Data
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Description Programmable Programmable LED LEDs LED 8 description Alarm mode 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for 0=Follow-S programmable LED 1=Follow-F 2=Latched-S 3=LatchedAck-F-S Description Programmable Programmable LED LEDs LED 9 description Alarm mode 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for 0=Follow-S...
Page 109: Time Synchronization
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Programmable LED 8 Enum Status of programma- 0=None ble LED 8 1=Ok 3=Alarm Programmable LED 9 Enum Status of programma- 0=None ble LED 9 1=Ok 3=Alarm Programmable LED 10 Enum Status of programma- 0=None ble LED 10...
Page 110 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 0.5 seconds per day. This RTC runs on a stored charge in a supercapacitor at least for 48 hours. After the capacitor has been discharged, the time is lost. Real-time clock at power-up At startup, the initial system time is recovered from the capacitor-backed RTC or set to 01-01-2010 if the RTC time was lost.
Page 111 2NGA002468 A Basic functions master is no longer considered connected. The list logic can be reset to clear the clock list. When IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization is used, the recommended maximum number of network hops from the grandmaster is 15 to ensure that the total inaccuracy stays within 1 μs.
Page 112 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A The time is requested from the SNTP server every 60 seconds. Supported SNTP versions are 3 and 4. SNTP requires a high-performance server to meet the performance expectations. 3.6.1.3 GNRLLTMS Signals Table 46: GNRLLTMS Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 113 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Name Type Description TRUE if the protection relay has been synchronized by an external master. FALSE if the clock has not been synchronized by an external master. Table 49: IRIG-B Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm status for clock synchronization.
Page 114: Time Settings
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 51: Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Time format 1=24H:MM:SS:MS Time format 1=24H:MM:SS:MS 2=12H:MM:SS:MS Date format 1=DD.MM.YYYY Date format 1=DD.MM.YYYY 2=DD/MM/YYYY 3=DD-MM-YYYY 4=MM.DD.YYYY 5=MM/DD/YYYY 6=YYYY-MM-DD 7=YYYY-DD-MM 8=YYYY/DD/MM Time settings Table 52: Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 115 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Table 53: Non group settings Parameter Values Unit Step Default Description (Range) Local time -840...840 Local time offset offset in mi- nutes Table 54: Non group settings Parameter Values Unit Step Default Description (Range) IP SNTP pri- 192.168.2.166 IP address for mary...
Page 116 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values Unit Step Default Description (Range) 12=December DST on day 0=reserved Daylight sav- 0=reserved (weekday) ing time on, 1=Monday day of week 2=Tuesday 3=Wednesday 4=Thursday 5=Friday 6=Saturday 7=Sunday DST off time 0...23 Daylight sav- (hours) ing time off, time (hh) DST off time...
Page 117 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Parameter Values Unit Step Default Description (Range) 7=Sunday DST offset -720...720 Daylight sav- ing time off- 3.6.1.5 GNRLLTMS Monitored data Table 56: GNRLLTMS Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Synch source Enum Time synchronization 0=Not defined source 1=SNTP primary...
Page 118: Generic Protection Control Protection
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description 13=25 ms 14=100 ms 15=250 ms 16=1 s 17=10 s 18=more than 10 s Generic protection control PROTECTION 3.7.1 PROTECTION Function block Figure 41: PROTECTION Function block 3.7.2 Functionality 3.7.2.1 PROTECTION Setting group control The protection relay supports six setting groups.
Page 119 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Table 57: Optional operation modes for setting group selection SG operation mode Description Operator (Default) Setting group can be changed with the setting Settings/Set- ting group/Active group. Value of the out- SG_LOGIC_SEL put is FALSE. Logic mode 1 Setting group can be changed with binary inputs ).
Page 120 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.7.2.2 PROTECTION Test mode The function has two outputs, BEH_TST and BEH_BLK, which are activated in test Table 60 mode according to Table 60: Test mode Test mode Description Protection Protection BEH_BLK BEH_TST Normal mode Normal operation FALSE FALSE IED blocked...
Page 121: Protection Signals
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.7.2.4 PROTECTION Special function block outputs The function block has a few outputs dedicated for special purposes. Table 61: Special function block outputs Output Description CNF_CHANGE Any setting change in the protection relay activates this out- put for a short period of time (100...200 ms).
Page 122: Protection Settings
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Description GRPOFF Group signal Group off signal for function blocks DEV_WARN BOOLEAN Protection relay internal warning FRQ_ADP_WARN BOOLEAN Frequency adaptivity warning FRQ_ADP_FAIL BOOLEAN Frequency adaptivity status fail FRQ_ADP_BU BOOLEAN Main frequency adaptivity source 3.7.4 PROTECTION Settings Table 64: PROTECTION Settings Parameter...
Page 123: Control L/R Control Access
2NGA002468 A Basic functions The actual Local/Remote control state is evaluated by the priority scheme on the function block inputs. If more than one input is active, the input with the highest priority is selected. The priority order is “off”, “local”, “station”, “remote”, “all”. The actual state is reflected on the CONTROL function outputs.
Page 124 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A REMOTE LOCAL IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 remote remote remote remote remote remote Figure 43: Station authority is “L,R” When station authority level “L,R” is used, control access can be selected using R/L button or CONTROL function block.
Page 125: Control Station Authority Level "L,R,L+R
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.8.5 CONTROL Station authority level "L,R,L+R" Station authority level "L,R, L+R" adds multilevel access support. Control access can also be simultaneously permitted from local or remote location. Simultaneous local or remote control operation is not allowed as one client and location at time can access controllable objects and they remain reserved until the previously started control operation is first completed by the client.
Page 126: Control Station Authority Level "L,S,R
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.8.6 CONTROL Station authority level "L,S,R" Station authority level "L,S,R" adds station control access. In this level IEC 61850 command originator category validation is performed to distinguish control commands with IEC 61850 command originator category set to “Remote” or “Station”.
Page 127: Control Station Authority Level "L,S,S+R,L+S,L+S+R
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Table 71: Station authority level “L,S,R” using CONTROL function block L/R Control L/R Control status Control access R/L button CTRL.LLN0.LocS CTRL.LLN0.MltL L/R state Local user IEC 61850 client IEC 61850 CTRL.LLN0.Loc client KeyHMI CTRL_OFF FALSE FALSE CTRL_LOC FALSE FALSE...
Page 128: Control Control Mode
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 72: Station authority level “L,S,S+R,L+S,L+S+R” using R/L button L/R Control L/R Control status Control access R/L button CTRL.LLN0.LocS CTRL.LLN0.MltL L/R state Local user IEC 61850 client IEC 61850 CTRL.LLN0.Loc client KeyHMI Local FALSE FALSE Remote FALSE TRUE Remote...
Page 129: Control Signals
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.8.9 CONTROL Signals Operation is different when CTRL_STA input is connected or unconnected in Application Configuration. If CTRL_STA is unconnected, then the IEC 61850 OPC server originator category is checked by the relay. Table 75: CONTROL Input signals Name Type Default...
Page 130: Fault Recorder Fltrfrc (Ansi Fr)
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 78: Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Command response Enum Latest command re- 0=No commands sponse 1=Select open 2=Select close 3=Operate open 4=Operate close 5=Direct open 6=Direct close 7=Cancel 8=Position reached 9=Position timeout 10=Object status only 11=Object direct 12=Object select...
Page 131: Fltrfrc Functionality
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.9.1 FLTRFRC Function block Figure 47: FLTRFRC Function block 3.9.2 FLTRFRC Functionality The protection relay has the capacity to store the records of the latest 128 fault events. Fault records include fundamental or RMS current values. The records enable the user to analyze recent power system events.
Page 132: Fltrfrc Analog Channel Configuration
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A The fault-related current, voltage, frequency, angle values, shot pointer and the active setting group number are taken from the moment of the operate event, or from the beginning of the fault if only a start event occurs during the fault. The maximum current value collects the maximum fault currents during the fault.
Page 133: Signals
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Table 80: Special conditions Condition Description URES1 connected to the cal- The function requires that all three voltage channels are con- VT connection must be "Wye" in culated residual voltage nected to UTVTR. Setting that particular UTVTR. URES2 connected to the cal- The function requires that all three voltage channels are con- VT connection must be "Wye"...
Page 134: Fltrfrc Monitored Data
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 82: FLTRFRC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Trig mode 0=From all faults Triggering mode 0=From all faults 1=From operate 2=From only start Table 83: FLTRFRC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range)
Page 135 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description 48=MPTTR1 50=DEFLPDEF1 51=DEFLPDEF2 53=DEFHPDEF1 56=EFPADM1 57=EFPADM2 58=EFPADM3 59=FRPFRQ1 60=FRPFRQ2 61=FRPFRQ3 62=FRPFRQ4 63=FRPFRQ5 64=FRPFRQ6 65=LSHDPFRQ1 66=LSHDPFRQ2 67=LSHDPFRQ3 68=LSHDPFRQ4 69=LSHDPFRQ5 71=DPHLPDOC1 72=DPHLPDOC2 74=DPHHPDOC1 77=MAPGAPC1 78=MAPGAPC2 79=MAPGAPC3 85=MNSPTOC1 86=MNSPTOC2 88=LOFLPTUC1 90=TR2PTDF1 91=LNPLDF1 92=LREFPNDF1 94=MPDIF1 96=HREFPDIF1 100=ROVPTOV1...
Page 136 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description -89=SPHHPTOC2 -88=SPHHPTOC1 -87=SPHPTUV4 -86=SPHPTUV3 -85=SPHPTUV2 -84=SPHPTUV1 -83=SPHPTOV4 -82=SPHPTOV3 -81=SPHPTOV2 -80=SPHPTOV1 -25=OEPVPH4 -24=OEPVPH3 -23=OEPVPH2 -22=OEPVPH1 -19=PSPTOV2 -18=PSPTOV1 -15=PREVPTOC1 -12=PHPTUC2 -11=PHPTUC1 -9=PHIZ1 5=PHLTPTOC1 20=EFLPTOC4 26=EFHPTOC5 27=EFHPTOC6 37=NSPTOC3 38=NSPTOC4 45=T1PTTR2 54=DEFHPDEF2 75=DPHHPDOC2 89=LOFLPTUC2 103=ROVPTOV4 117=PSPTUV2 -13=PHPTUC3...
Page 137 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description 80=MAPGAPC4 81=MAPGAPC5 82=MAPGAPC6 83=MAPGAPC7 -102=MAPGAPC12 -101=MAPGAPC11 -100=MAPGAPC10 -99=MAPGAPC9 -98=RESCPSCH1 -57=FDEFLPDEF2 -56=FDEFLPDEF1 -54=FEFLPTOC1 -53=FDPHLPDOC2 -52=FDPHLPDOC1 -50=FPHLPTOC1 -47=FRPFRQ8 -46=FRPFRQ7 -45=MAPGAPC24 -44=MAPGAPC23 -43=MAPGAPC22 -42=MAPGAPC21 -41=MAPGAPC20 -40=MAPGAPC19 -37=HAEFPTOC1 -35=WPWDE3 -34=WPWDE2 -33=WPWDE1 52=DEFLPDEF3 84=MAPGAPC8 93=LREFPNDF2 97=HREFPDIF2 -117=XDEFLPDEF2 -116=XDEFLPDEF1...
Page 138 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description -61=COLPTOC1 -106=MAPGAPC16 -105=MAPGAPC15 -104=MAPGAPC14 -103=MAPGAPC13 -76=MAPGAPC18 -75=MAPGAPC17 -62=SRCPTOC1 -74=DOPPDPR3 -73=DOPPDPR2 -70=DUPPDPR2 -58=UZPDIS1 -36=UEXPDIS1 14=MFADPSDE1 -10=LVRTPTUV1 -8=LVRTPTUV2 -6=LVRTPTUV3 -122=DPH3LPDOC1 -121=DPH3HPDOC2 -120=DPH3HPDOC1 -119=PH3LPTOC2 -118=PH3LPTOC1 -79=PH3HPTOC2 -78=PH3HPTOC1 -77=PH3IPTOC1 -127=PHAPTUV1 -124=PHAPTOV1 -123=DPH3LPDOC2 -68=PHPVOC2 -67=DQPTUV2 -39=UEXPDIS2 98=MHZPDIF1 -4=MREFPTOC1...
Page 139 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description -49=FRPFRQ10 -48=FRPFRQ9 -38=DSTPDIS1 -21=CUBPTOC3 -20=CUBPTOC2 -17=MPUPF2 -2=PHCPTUV1 -1=PHBPTUV1 4=PHIPTOC3 15=MFADPSDE2 16=MFADPSDE3 73=DPHLPDOC3 76=DPHHPDOC3 95=HCUBPTOC2 99=MREFPTOC2 124=PSPTUV4 125=PSPTOV4 127=JAMPTOC2 21=DEFHPDEF4 33=DPHHPDOC4 34=DPHLPDOC4 47=DEFLPDEF4 55=DEFHPDEF3 42=CNUPTOV1 43=CNUPTOV2 49=DEFLPDEF5 87=DEFHPDEF5 126=ARCSARC4 Protection (rec. set 2) Enum Protection function 0=None...
Page 140 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description 21=PHIPIOC3 22=PHPTUV5 23=PHPVOC3 24=PHPVOC4 25=PHPVOC5 26=PHVPTOV2 27=PHIPTOC4 28=PHIPTOC5 29=PHLPTOC4 30=PHLPTOC5 31=RPTTR1 32=UZPDIS2 33=UZPDIS3 Start duration FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Maximum start dura- tion of all stages during the fault Operate time FLOAT32 0.000...999999.999 Operate time Breaker clear time...
Page 141 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Current IL1:1 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Phase A current (1) Current IL2:1 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Phase B current (1) Current IL3:1 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Phase C current (1) Current Io:1 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Residual current (1) Current Io-Calc:1 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000...
Page 142 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Voltage Ng-Seq:1 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 Negative sequence volt- Voltage UL1:2 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 Phase A voltage (2) Voltage UL2:2 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 Phase B voltage (2) Voltage UL3:2 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 Phase B voltage (2) Voltage U12:2 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000...
Page 143 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Angle U23:2 - IL1:2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Angle phase B to phase C voltage (2) - phase A current (2) Angle U31:2 - IL2:2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Angle phase C to phase A voltage (2) - phase B current (2) Angle U12:2 - IL3:2...
Page 144: Nonvolatile Memory
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.10 Nonvolatile memory The relay does not include any battery backup power. If the auxiliary power is lost, critical information such as relay configuration and settings, events, disturbance recordings and other critical data are saved to the relay’s nonvolatile memory. The relay’s real-time clock keeps running via a 48-hour capacitor backup.
Page 145 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Table 86: Calculated voltages for different connection types Voltage connection Phase-to-phase Phase-to-neutral Residual voltage Uo voltages (Ph-Ph) voltages (Ph-n) 3 × ph-n yes, calculated yes, calculated 3 × ph-n + Uo yes, calculated 2 × ph-n yes, calculated yes, missing ph-n cal- culated...
Page 146: Preprocessing Blocks
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.12 Preprocessing blocks 3.12.1 Phase current preprocessing ILTCTR 3.12.1.1 ILTCTR Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Phase current preprocessing ILTCTR ILTCTR ILTCTR 3.12.1.2 ILTCTR Function block Figure 48: ILTCTR Function block 3.12.1.3 ILTCTR Functionality The phase current preprocessing function ILTCTR is used for setting up the three...
Page 147 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Rated secondary Val setting defines the ratio for sensor use. This value multiplied Rated frequency setting (under Configuration > System) gives the sensor's by the nominal voltage corresponding to the configured between sensors’ and primary rated current. Reverse polarity setting is used to reverse the polarity of phase CTs.
Page 148 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A ILTCTR Input signals Table 88: ILTCTR Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Analog input SIGNAL Analog input SIGNAL Analog input ILTCTR Output signals Table 89: ILTCTR Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm WARNING BOOLEAN Warning SIGNAL...
Page 149: Residual Current Preprocessing Restctr
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Amplitude Corr A 0.9000...1.1000 0.0001 1.0000 Phase A amplitude correction factor Amplitude Corr B 0.9000...1.1000 0.0001 1.0000 Phase B amplitude correction factor Amplitude Corr C 0.9000...1.1000 0.0001 1.0000 Phase C amplitude correction factor Angle Corr A -5.0000...5.0000...
Page 150 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.12.2.3 RESTCTR Functionality The residual current preprocessing function RESTCTR is used for setting up the residual current measurement channels. Input channels for RESTCTR are either physical hardware or IEC 61850-9-2 sampled value channels. The output IRES_MEAS channel of RESTCTR can be connected to different applications which require measured residual current.
Page 151 2NGA002468 A Basic functions RESTCTR Input signals Table 93: RESTCTR Input signals Name Type Default Description IRES SIGNAL Residual current RESTCTR Output signals Table 94: RESTCTR Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm WARNING BOOLEAN Warning IRES_MEAS SIGNAL Residual current, measured IRES_MEAS_DR SIGNAL Residual current, measured,...
Page 152: Phase And Residual Voltage Preprocessing Utvtr
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.12.3 Phase and residual voltage preprocessing UTVTR 3.12.3.1 UTVTR Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Phase and residual voltage prepro- UTVTR UTVTR UTVTR cessing 3.12.3.2 UTVTR Function block Figure 50: UTVTR Function block 3.12.3.3 UTVTR Functionality The phase and residual voltage preprocessing function UTVTR is used for setting up...
Page 153 Division ratio setting defines the ratio for sensor use. The division ratio for ABB voltage sensors is typically 10000:1. Thus, the Division ratio setting is usually set to "10000". For more information on Chapter 3.13 Sensor inputs for currents and voltages...
Page 154 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A is negligible, the WARNING, URES_WARNING, ALARM or URES_ALARM outputs are not activated. SMV Max Delay setting defines how long the receiver waits for the SMV frames before activating the ALARM and URES_ALARM outputs. This setting can be accessed via Configuration >...
Page 155 2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.12.3.4 UTVTR Residual voltage scaling Calculated U is scaled to the same level as measured U . The scaling is determined by the ratio of ULTVTR primary voltage and RESTVTR primary voltage within one UTVTR instance. The assumption is open-delta U measurement type.
Page 156 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A UTVTR Input signals Table 99: UTVTR Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Analog input SIGNAL Analog input SIGNAL Analog input URES SIGNAL Residual voltage MINCB_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False ACTIVE when external MCB opens protected voltage circuit UTVTR Output signals Table 100: UTVTR Output signals Name...
Page 157 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Table 101: UTVTR (3U) Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Voltage input type 1=Voltage trafo Type of the voltage 1=Voltage trafo input 3=Voltage sensor Primary voltage 0.100...800.000 0.001 20.000 Primary rated phase-to-phase voltage Secondary voltage...
Page 158: Sensor Inputs For Currents And Voltages
Figure 53: Example of ABB Rogowski current sensor KECA 80 D85 rating plate Current (Rogowski) sensor setting example In this example, an 80 A/0.150 V at 50 Hz (0.180 V at 60 Hz) sensor, as Figure 53 , is used in a 50 Hz electrical network.
Page 159 2NGA002468 A Basic functions × (Equation 1) Rated Secondary Value in mV/Hz Application nominal current Sensor-rated primary current Network nominal frequency Sensor-rated voltage at the rated current in mV In this example, the value is as calculated using the equation. ×...
Page 160 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 106: Application nominal current relation to the upper limit of linear measurement range Application nominal Rated secondary value Upper limit of linear current (I with 80A / 0.150 V at 50 measurement range Hz (0.180 V at 60 Hz) 40...800 A 1.500...30.000 mV/Hz 60 ×...
Page 161: Binary Inputs
Primary voltage parameter is set to 10 kV. For protection relays with sensor Voltage input type is set to "Voltage sensor". The measurement support, the VT connection parameter is set to the "WYE" type. The division ratio for ABB Division ratio parameter is voltage sensors is most often 10000:1. Thus, the usually set to "10000".
Page 162: Binary Input Filter Time
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.14.1 Binary input threshold voltage Input threshold voltage is used to set the threshold level of the The parameter Input threshold voltage determines the voltage level for the activation binary inputs. of the inputs. Table 108: Input threshold voltage parameters Parameter Values Default...
Page 163: Oscillation Suppression
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Table 110: Binary input states Control voltage Input # invert State of binary input FALSE (0) TRUE (1) TRUE (1) FALSE (0) When a binary input is inverted, the state of the input is TRUE (1) when no control voltage is applied to its terminals.
Page 164: Power Output Contacts
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A the operating and reset time, continuous current rating, make and carry for short time, breaking rate and minimum connected burden. A combination of series or parallel contacts can also be used for special applications. When appropriate, a signal output can also be used to energize an external trip relay, which in turn can be confiugred to energize the breaker trip or close coils.
Page 165: Dual Single-Pole High-Speed Power Outputs Hso1, Hso2 And Hso3
2NGA002468 A Basic functions When the two poles of the contacts are connected in series, they have the same technical specification as PO1 for breaking duty. The trip circuit supervision hardware and associated functionality which can supervise the breaker coil both during closing and opening condition are also provided.
Page 166: Signal Output Contacts
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A X110 HSO1 HSO2 HSO3 Figure 58: High-speed power outputs HSO1, HSO2 and HSO3 The reset time of the high-speed output contacts is longer than that of the conventional output contacts. High-speed power contacts are part of the card BIO0007 with eight binary inputs and three HSOs.
Page 167: Signal Outputs So1 And So2 In Power Supply Module
2NGA002468 A Basic functions X100 Figure 59: Internal fault signal output IRF 3.15.2.2 Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 in power supply module Signal outputs (normally open/form A or change-over/form C) SO1 (dual parallel form C) and SO2 (single contact/form A) are part of the power supply module of the protection relay.
Page 168 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 61: Signal output in RTD0002 3.15.2.4 Signal outputs SO1, SO2, SO3 and SO4 in BIO0005 The optional card BIO0005 provides the signal outputs SO1, SO2 SO3 and SO4. Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 are dual, parallel form C contacts; SO3 is a single form C contact, and SO4 is a single form A contact.
Page 169: Signal Outputs So1, So2 And So3 In Bio0006
2NGA002468 A Basic functions X110 X110 Figure 62: Signal output in BIO0005 3.15.2.5 Signal outputs SO1, SO2 and SO3 in BIO0006 The optional card BIO0006 provides the signal outputs SO1, SO2 and SO3. Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 are dual, parallel form C contacts; SO3 is a single form C contact.
Page 170: Rtd/Ma Inputs
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A X130 Figure 63: Signal output in BIO0006 3.16 RTD/mA inputs 3.16.1 Functionality The RTD and mA analog input module is used for monitoring and metering current (mA), temperature (°C) and resistance (Ω). Each input can be linearly scaled for various applications, for example, transformer’s tap changer position indication.
Page 171: Selection Of Output Value Format
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Table 112: Limits for the RTD/mA inputs Input mode Description Not in use Default selection. Used when the corresponding input is not used. 0...20 mA Selection for analog DC milliampere current inputs in the input range of 0...20 mA.
Page 172: Measurement Chain Supervision
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Value unit = "Ohm" when The input scaling can be bypassed by selecting Input mode = "Resistance" is used and by selecting Value unit = "Ampere" Input mode = "0...20 mA" is used. when Example for linear scaling Milliampere input is used as tap changer position information.
Page 173: Limit Value Supervision
2NGA002468 A Basic functions RTD input supervision RTD sensor currents are measured continuously at a fixed rate. The delay between the RTD current/connectivity checks is about 4s at a maximum (if all 8 RTD and mA channels are active). If the RTD current is not within ±20% of the expected current, the measurement is considered to be invalid, and the channel is discarded until a valid current is obtained.
Page 174: Deadband Supervision
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Out of Range Value maximum AI_RANGE#=3 Val high high limit Hysteresis AI_RANGE#=1 Val high limit AI_RANGE#=0 AI_RANGE#=0 Val low limit AI_RANGE#=2 Val low low limit AI_RANGE#=4 Value Reported Value minimum Figure 65: Limit value supervision for RTD The range information of “High-high limit”...
Page 175 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Figure 66: Integral deadband supervision Value The deadband value used in the integral calculation is configured with the deadband setting. The value represents the percentage of the difference between the maximum and minimum limits in the units of 0.001 percent * seconds. The reporting delay of the integral algorithms in seconds is calculated with the formula: deadband Value maximum Value minimum...
Page 176: Rtd Temperature Vs. Resistance
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Since the function can be utilized in various measurement modes, the default values are set to the extremes; thus, it is very important to set correct limit values to suit the application before the deadband supervision works properly.
Page 177 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Figure 67: Three RTD/resistance sensors connected according to the 3-wire connection Figure 68: Three RTD/resistance sensors connected according to the 2-wire connection REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 178: Rtd/Ma Card Variants
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A X130 Sensor Shunt Transducer (44 Ω) Figure 69: mA wiring connection 3.16.2.11 RTD/mA card variants The available variants of RTD cards are 6RTD/2mA and 2RTD/1mA. The features are similar in both cards. 6RTD/2mA card This card accepts two milliampere inputs and six inputs from the RTD sensors. The inputs 1 and 2 are used for current measurement, whereas inputs from 3 to 8 are used for resistance type of measurements.
Page 179 2NGA002468 A Basic functions X110 Resistor sensor RTD1 RTD2 RTD3 Figure 70: Three RTD sensors and two resistance sensors connected according to the 3-wire connection for 6RTD/2mA card X110 Resistor sensor RTD1 RTD2 RTD3 Figure 71: Three RTD sensors and two resistance sensors connected according to the 2-wire connection for 6RTD/2mA card REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 180 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A X110 Sensor Shunt Transducer (44 Ω) Figure 72: mA wiring connection for 6RTD/2mA card 2RTD/1mA card This type of card accepts one milliampere input, two inputs from RTD sensors and five inputs from VTs. The Input 1 is assigned for current measurements, inputs 2 and 3 are for RTD sensors and inputs 4 to 8 are used for measuring input data from RTD/mA input connections The examples of 3-wire and 2-wire connections of resistance and temperature...
Page 181: Signals
2NGA002468 A Basic functions X130 Resistor sensor RTD1 RTD2 Figure 74: Two RTD and resistance sensors connected according to the 2-wire connection for RTD/mA card X130 Sensor Shunt Transducer (44 Ω) Figure 75: mA wiring connection for RTD/mA card 3.16.3 Signals 3.16.3.1 RTD/mA analog input signals...
Page 182 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Description AI_VAL2 FLOAT32 mA input, Connectors 3-4, instantaneous val- AI_VAL3 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 5-6-11c, instantane- ous value AI_VAL4 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 7-8-11c, instantaneous value AI_VAL5 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 9-10-11c, instantane- ous value AI_VAL6 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 13-14-12c, instantane-...
Page 183: Settings
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.16.4 Settings 3.16.4.1 RTD input settings Table 119: RTD input settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Input mode 1=Not in use Analogue input mode 1=Not in use 2=Resistance 10=Pt100 11=Pt250 20=Ni100 21=Ni120 22=Ni250 30=Cu10 Input maximum 0...2000 Ω...
Page 184: Rtd/Ma Monitored Data
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.16.4.2 mA input settings Table 120: mA input settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Input mode 1=Not in use Analogue input mode 1=Not in use 5=0..20 mA Input maximum 0...20 Maximum analogue input value for mA or resistance scaling Input minimum 0...20...
Page 185 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description AI_DB3 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000 .0 RTD input, Connectors 5-6-11c, reported value AI_RANGE3 Enum RTD input, Connectors 5-6-11c, range 0=normal 1=high 2=low 3=high-high 4=low-low AI_DB4 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000 .0 RTD input, Connectors 7-8-11c, reported value AI_RANGE4 Enum...
Page 186: Smv Function Blocks
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 122: 2RTD/1mA monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description AI_DB1 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000. mA input, Con- nectors 1-2, re- ported value AI_RANGE1 Enum mA input, Con- 0=normal nectors 1-2, 1=high range 2=low 3=high-high 4=low-low AI_DB2 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000.
Page 187 2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.17.1.1 SMVSENDER Function block Figure 76: SMVSENDER Function block 3.17.1.2 SMVSENDER Functionality The SMV stream sender (IEC 61850-9-2LE) function SMVSENDER is used for activating the SMV sending functionality. It adds/removes the sampled value control block and the related data set into/from the sending device's configuration. It has only input signals.
Page 188: Smv Stream Receiver (Iec 61850-9-2Le) Smvrcv
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.17.2 SMV stream receiver (IEC 61850-9-2LE) SMVRCV 3.17.2.1 SMVRCV Function block Figure 77: SMVRCV Function block 3.17.2.2 SMVRCV Functionality The SMV stream receiver (IEC 61850-9-2LE) function SMVRCV is used for connecting SMV channels to the application. 3.17.2.3 SMVRCV Signals Table 124: SMVRCV Output signals...
Page 189 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Common signals The VALID output indicates the validity of received GOOSE data, which means in case of valid, that the GOOSE communication is working and received data quality bits (if configured) indicate good process data. Invalid status is caused either by bad data quality bits or GOOSE communication failure.
Page 190: Received Goose Binary Information Goosercv_Bin
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.18.1 Received GOOSE binary information GOOSERCV_BIN 3.18.1.1 GOOSERCV_BIN Function block Figure 78: GOOSERCV_BIN Function block 3.18.1.2 GOOSERCV_BIN Functionality The received GOOSE binary information function GOOSERCV_BIN is used to connect the GOOSE binary inputs to the application. 3.18.1.3 GOOSERCV_BIN Signals Table 125: GOOSERCV_BIN Input signals...
Page 191: Received Goose Double Binary Information Goosercv_Dp
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.18.2 Received GOOSE double binary information GOOSERCV_DP 3.18.2.1 GOOSERCV_DP Function block Figure 79: GOOSERCV_DP Function block 3.18.2.2 GOOSERCV_DP Functionality The received GOOSE double binary information function GOOSERCV_DP is used to connect the GOOSE double binary inputs to the application. 3.18.2.3 GOOSERCV_DP Signals Table 127: GOOSERCV_DP Input signals...
Page 192: Received Goose Measured Value Information Goosercv_Mv
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.18.3 Received GOOSE measured value information GOOSERCV_MV 3.18.3.1 GOOSERCV_MV Function block Figure 80: GOOSERCV_MV Function block 3.18.3.2 GOOSERCV_MV Functionality The received GOOSE measured value information function GOOSERCV_MV is used to connect the GOOSE measured value inputs to the application. 3.18.3.3 GOOSERCV_MV Signals Table 129: GOOSERCV_MV Input signals...
Page 193: Received Goose 8-Bit Integer Value Information Goosercv_Int8
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.18.4 Received GOOSE 8-bit integer value information GOOSERCV_INT8 3.18.4.1 GOOSERCV_INT8 Function block Figure 81: GOOSERCV_INT8 Function block 3.18.4.2 GOOSERCV_INT8 Functionality The received GOOSE 8-bit integer value information function GOOSERCV_INT8 is used to connect the GOOSE 8-bit integer inputs to the application. 3.18.4.3 GOOSERCV_INT8 Signals Table 131: GOOSERCV_INT8 Input signals...
Page 194: Received Goose 32-Bit Integer Value Information Goosercv_Int32
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.18.5 Received GOOSE 32-bit integer value information GOOSERCV_INT32 3.18.5.1 GOOSERCV_INT32 Function block Figure 82: GOOSERCV_INT32 Function block 3.18.5.2 GOOSERCV_INT32 Functionality The received GOOSE 32-bit integer value information function GOOSERCV_INT32 is used to connect GOOSE 32-bit integer inputs to the application. 3.18.5.3 GOOSERCV_INT32 Signals Table 133: GOOSERCV_INT32 Input signals...
Page 195: Received Goose Interlocking Information Goosercv_Intl
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.18.6 Received GOOSE interlocking information GOOSERCV_INTL 3.18.6.1 GOOSERCV_INTL Function block Figure 83: GOOSERCV_INTL Function block 3.18.6.2 GOOSERCV_INTL Functionality The received GOOSE interlocking information function GOOSERCV_INTL is used to connect the GOOSE double binary input to the application and extracting single binary position signals from the double binary position signal.
Page 196: Received Goose Measured Value (Phasor) Information Goosercv_Cmv
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.18.7 Received GOOSE measured value (phasor) information GOOSERCV_CMV 3.18.7.1 GOOSERCV_CMV Function block Figure 84: GOOSERCV_CMV Function block 3.18.7.2 GOOSERCV_CMV Functionality The received GOOSE measured value (phasor) information function GOOSERCV_CMV is used to connect GOOSE measured value inputs to the application.
Page 197: Received Goose Enumerator Value Information Goosercv_Enum
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.18.8 Received GOOSE enumerator value information GOOSERCV_ENUM 3.18.8.1 GOOSERCV_ENUM Function block Figure 85: GOOSERCV_ENUM Function block 3.18.8.2 GOOSERCV_ENUM Functionality The received GOOSE enumerator value information function GOOSERCV_ENUM is used to connect GOOSE enumerator inputs to the application. 3.18.8.3 GOOSERCV_ENUM Signals Table 139: GOOSERCV_ENUM Input signals...
Page 198: Bad Signal Quality Qty_Bad
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.19.1.1 QTY_GOOD Function block Figure 86: QTY_GOOD Function block 3.19.1.2 QTY_GOOD Functionality The good signal quality function QTY_GOOD evaluates the quality bits of the input signal and passes it as a Boolean signal for the application. The IN input can be connected to any logic application signal (except preprocessing block).
Page 199: Received Goose Test Mode Qty_Goose_Test
2NGA002468 A Basic functions The IN input can be connected to any logic application signal (except preprocessing block). Due to application logic quality bit propagation, each (simple and even combined) signal has quality which can be evaluated. The OUT output indicates quality bad of the input signal. Input signals that have any other than test bit set, will indicate quality bad status.
Page 200: Qty_Goose_Comm Function Block
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 146: QTY_GOOSE_TEST Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output signal 3.19.4 GOOSE communication quality QTY_GOOSE_COMM 3.19.4.1 QTY_GOOSE_COMM Function block Figure 89: QTY_GOOSE_COMM Function block 3.19.4.2 QTY_GOOSE_COMM Functionality The GOOSE communication quality function QTY_GOOSE_COMM evaluates the peer device communication status from the quality bits of the input signal and passes it as a Boolean signal to the application.
Page 201: T_Health Function Block
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.19.5.1 T_HEALTH Function block Figure 90: T_HEALTH Function block 3.19.5.2 T_HEALTH Functionality The GOOSE data health function T_HEALTH evaluates enumerated data of “Health” data attribute. This function block can only be used with GOOSE. The IN input can be connected to GOOSERCV_ENUM function block, which is receiving the LD0.LLN0.Health.stVal data attribute sent by another device.
Page 202: Fault Direction Evaluation T_Dir
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.19.6 Fault direction evaluation T_DIR 3.19.6.1 T_DIR Function block Figure 91: T_DIR Function block 3.19.6.2 T_DIR Functionality The fault direction evaluation function T_DIR evaluates enumerated data of the FAULT_DIR and DIRECTION data attributes of the directional functions. The outputs FWD and REV are extracted from the enumerated input value.
Page 203: Fault Direction Evaluation T_Dir_Fwd
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.19.7 Fault direction evaluation T_DIR_FWD 3.19.7.1 T_DIR_FWD Function block Figure 92: T_DIR_FWD Function block 3.19.7.2 T_DIR_FWD Functionality The fault direction evaluation function T_DIR_FWD evaluates enumerated data of the FAULT_DIR and DIRECTION data attributes of the directional functions. The output FWD is extracted from the enumerated input value.
Page 204: Fault Direction Evaluation T_Dir_Rev
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.19.8 Fault direction evaluation T_DIR_REV 3.19.8.1 T_DIR_REV Function block Figure 93: T_DIR_REV Function block 3.19.8.2 T_DIR_REV Functionality The fault direction evaluation function T_DIR_REV evaluates enumerated data of the FAULT_DIR and DIRECTION data attributes of the directional functions. The output REV is extracted from the enumerated input value.
Page 205: Enumerator To Boolean Conversion T_Tcmd
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.19.9 Enumerator to boolean conversion T_TCMD 3.19.9.1 T_TCMD Function block Figure 94: T_TCMD Function block 3.19.9.2 T_TCMD Functionality The enumerator to boolean conversion function T_TCMD is used to convert enumerated input signals to boolean output signals. Table 157: Conversion from enumerated to Boolean RAISE LOWER...
Page 206: 32-Bit Integer To Binary Command Conversion T_Tcmd_Bin
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.19.10 32-bit integer to binary command conversion T_TCMD_BIN 3.19.10.1 T_TCMD_BIN Function block Figure 95: T_TCMD_BIN Function block 3.19.10.2 T_TCMD_BIN Functionality The 32-bit integer to binary command conversion function T_TCMD_BIN is used to convert 32 bit integer input signal to boolean output signals. Table 160: Conversion from integer to Boolean RAISE LOWER...
Page 207: Binary Command To 32-Bit Integer Conversion T_Bin_Tcmd
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.19.11 Binary command to 32-bit integer conversion T_BIN_TCMD 3.19.11.1 T_BIN_TCMD Function block Figure 96: T_BIN_TCMD Function block 3.19.11.2 T_BIN_TCMD Functionality The binary command to 32-bit integer conversion function T_BIN_TCMD is used to convert boolean input signals to 32 bit integer output signals. Table 163: Conversion from Boolean to integer RAISE LOWER...
Page 208: Integer 32-Bit To Real Conversion T_I32_To_R
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.19.12 Integer 32-bit to real conversion T_I32_TO_R 3.19.12.1 T_I32_TO_R Function block Figure 97: T_I32_TO_R Function block 3.19.12.2 T_I32_TO_R Functionality The integer 32-bit to real conversion function T_I32_TO_R converts a 32-bit integer to a real value. The output quality follows the input quality information. If the integer value is greater than 2097151, then the real value is set to 2097151 and the output quality is set as bad.
Page 209: Real To Integer 8-Bit Conversion T_R_To_I8
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.19.13 Real to integer 8-bit conversion T_R_TO_I8 3.19.13.1 T_R_TO_I8 Function block Figure 98: T_R_TO_I8 Function block 3.19.13.2 T_R_TO_I8 Functionality The real to integer 8-bit conversion function T_R_TO_I8 converts a real to an integer 8-bit value. The real value is floored to integer value. The output quality follows the input quality information.
Page 210: Real To Integer 32-Bit Conversion T_R_To_I32
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.19.14 Real to integer 32-bit conversion T_R_TO_I32 3.19.14.1 T_R_TO_I32 Function block Figure 99: T_R_TO_I32 Function block 3.19.14.2 T_R_TO_I32 Functionality The real to integer 32-bit conversion function T_R_TO_I32 converts a real to an integer 32-bit value. The real value is floored to integer value. The output quality follows the input quality information.
Page 211: Integer 32-Bit Switch Selector Switchi32
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.19.15 Integer 32-bit switch selector SWITCHI32 3.19.15.1 SWITCHI32 Function block Figure 100: SWITCHI32 Function block 3.19.15.2 SWITCHI32 Functionality The integer 32-bit switch selector function SWITCHI32 is operated by the CTL_SW input, which selects the output value INT32_OUT between the INT32_IN1 and INT32_IN2 inputs.
Page 212: Integer 32-Bit To Boolean Conversion T_I32_To_B16
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.19.16 Integer 32-bit to boolean conversion T_I32_TO_B16 3.19.16.1 T_I32_TO_B16 Function block Figure 101: T_I32_TO_B16 Function block 3.19.16.2 T_I32_TO_B16 Functionality The integer 32-bit to boolean conversion function T_I32_TO_B16 is used to transform an integer input INT32_IN into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals OUT1… OUT16.
Page 213: Boolean To Integer 32-Bit Conversion T_B16_To_I32
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Name Type Description OUT4 BOOLEAN Boolean output value 4 OUT5 BOOLEAN Boolean output value 5 OUT6 BOOLEAN Boolean output value 6 OUT7 BOOLEAN Boolean output value 7 OUT8 BOOLEAN Boolean output value 8 OUT9 BOOLEAN Boolean output value 9 OUT10 BOOLEAN Boolean output value 10...
Page 214: Integer 8-Bit To Integer 32-Bit Conversion T_I8_To_I32
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.19.17.3 T_B16_TO_I32 Signals Table 177: T_B16_TO_I32 Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0 (FALSE) Boolean input value 1 BOOLEAN 0 (FALSE) Boolean input value 2 BOOLEAN 0 (FALSE) Boolean input value 3 BOOLEAN 0 (FALSE) Boolean input value 4 BOOLEAN 0 (FALSE)
Page 215: Configurable Logic Blocks
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.19.18.2 T_I8_TO_I32 Functionality The integer 8-bit to integer 32-bit conversion function T_I8_TO_I32 converts a 8-bit integer value to a 32-bit integer value. The output quality follows the input quality information. 3.19.18.3 T_I8_TO_I32 Signals Table 179: T_I8_TO_I32 Input signals Name Type Default...
Page 216 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 105: A = Trip pulse is shorter than Pulse time setting, B = Trip pulse is longer than Pulse time setting TPGAPC Signals Table 181: TPGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 2...
Page 217: Basic Functions
2NGA002468 A Basic functions TPSGAPC Functionality The minimum pulse timer second resolution, two channels, function TPSGAPC contains two independent timers. The function has a settable pulse length (in seconds). The timers are used for setting the minimum pulse length for example, the signal outputs.
Page 218 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.20.1.3 Minimum pulse timer minutes resolution, two channels TPMGAPC (ANSI 62TPM) TPMGAPC Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Minimum pulse timer minutes reso- TPMGAPC 62TPM lution, two channels TPMGAPC Function block Figure 108: TPMGAPC Function block TPMGAPC Functionality The minimum pulse timer minutes resolution, two channels, function TPMGAPC...
Page 219: Pulse Timer, Eight Channels Ptgapc (Ansi 62Pt)
2NGA002468 A Basic functions TPMGAPC Settings Table 189: TPMGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pulse time 0...2880 Minimum pulse time 3.20.2 Pulse timer, eight channels PTGAPC (ANSI 62PT) 3.20.2.1 PTGAPC Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification...
Page 220 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A dt = Pulse delay time Figure 111: Timer operation 3.20.2.4 PTGAPC Signals Table 190: PTGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 2 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 3 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 4 status...
Page 221: Daily Timer Dtmgapc (Ansi Dtm)
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Table 192: PTGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pulse time 1 0...3600000 Pulse time Pulse time 2 0...3600000 Pulse time Pulse time 3 0...3600000 Pulse time Pulse time 4 0...3600000 Pulse time Pulse time 5 0...3600000...
Page 222 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.20.3.2 DTMGAPC Function block Figure 112: DTMGAPC Function block 3.20.3.3 DTMGAPC Functionality The daily timer function DTMGAPC is used to activate or deactivate its output at the set time of the day. It is possible to set a different activation or deactivation time separately for each day of the week.
Page 223 2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.20.3.5 DTMGAPC Application DTMGAPC is useful in applications that require signal activation and deactivation at a specific time of the day. Different activation times and duration can be set for different days of the week. For example, if the signal should be active on Mondays Monday Act enable setting should be "True", Monday between 7:15 and 16:00, the Act hour should be "7", Monday Act Mn should be "15", and Monday off delay should...
Page 224 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 5=off Monday Act enable false Activation / deacti- 0=False vation need on 1=True Monday Monday Act hour 0...23 Activation hour time for Monday Monday Act Mn 0...59 Activation minute time for Monday Monday off delay 1...1440...
Page 225: Calendar Function Calgapc (Ansi Cal)
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Sunday Act Mn 0...59 Activation minute time for Sunday Sunday off delay 1...1440 Activation duration for Sunday 3.20.3.8 DTMGAPC Monitored data Table 198: DTMGAPC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description DTMGAPC...
Page 226 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A BLOCK Date comparator FREEZE Figure 116: Functional module diagram CALGAPC Date comparator This module compares the current date (excluding the calendar year) with the set activation and deactivation date and month settings. If the system date and month Activation day and Activation month settings, output are the same or greater than Deactivation day and...
Page 227 2NGA002468 A Basic functions CALGAPC can be connected to the BLOCK input of DTMGAPC (using NOT gate) so that DTMGAPC activates only for the duration defined by CALGAPC. Figure 118: Example of Calendar function usage 3.20.4.6 Signals CALGAPC Input signals Table 199: CALGAPC Input signals Name Type...
Page 228: Time Delay Off, Eight Channels Tofgapc (Ansi 62Tof)
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 12=December Deactivation day 1...31 Deactivation day Deactivation month 1=January 1=January Deactivation month 2=February 3=March 4=April 5=May 6=June 7=July 8=August 9=September 10=October 11=November 12=December 3.20.4.8 CALGAPC Monitored data Table 202: CALGAPC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 229 2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.20.5.2 TOFGAPC Function block Figure 119: TOFGAPC Function block 3.20.5.3 TOFGAPC Functionality The time delay off, eight channels, function TOFGAPC can be used, for example, for a drop-off-delayed output related to the input signal. The function contains eight independent timers.
Page 230 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 204: TOFGAPC Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output 1 status BOOLEAN Output 2 status BOOLEAN Output 3 status BOOLEAN Output 4 status BOOLEAN Output 5 status BOOLEAN Output 6 status BOOLEAN Output 7 status BOOLEAN Output 8 status 3.20.5.5...
Page 231: Time Delay On, Eight Channels Tongapc (Ansi 62Ton)
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.20.6 Time delay on, eight channels TONGAPC (ANSI 62TON) 3.20.6.1 TONGAPC Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Time delay on, eight channels TONGAPC 62TON 3.20.6.2 TONGAPC Function block Figure 121: TONGAPC Function block 3.20.6.3 TONGAPC Functionality The time delay on, eight channels, function TONGAPC can be used, for example,...
Page 232 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Input 3 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 4 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 5 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 6 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 7 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 8 Table 209: TONGAPC Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output 1 BOOLEAN...
Page 233: Sr Flip-Flop, Eight Channels, Nonvolatile Srgapc (Ansi Sr)
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description T_LEFT7 FLOAT32 0...3600 Time left 7 T_LEFT8 FLOAT32 0...3600 Time left 8 3.20.6.7 TONGAPC Technical data Table 212: TONGAPC Technical data Characteristic Value Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms 3.20.7 SR flip-flop, eight channels, nonvolatile SRGAPC (ANSI SR) 3.20.7.1...
Page 234 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A where the SET input has the higher priority over the RESET input. The status of each Q# output is retained in the nonvolatile memory. The individual reset for each Q# output is available on the LHMI or through tool via communication. Table 213: Truth table for SRGAPC 3.20.7.4 SRGAPC Signals...
Page 235: Boolean Value Event Creation Mvgapc (Ansi Mv)
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q8 output when BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q8 output when set Table 215: SRGAPC Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Q1 status BOOLEAN Q2 status BOOLEAN Q3 status BOOLEAN Q4 status BOOLEAN Q5 status BOOLEAN...
Page 236 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.20.8.1 MVGAPC Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Boolean value event creation MVGAPC 3.20.8.2 MVGAPC Function block Figure 124: MVGAPC Function block 3.20.8.3 MVGAPC Functionality The boolean value event creation function MVGAPC is used for user logic bits. Each input state is directly copied to the output state.
Page 237: Integer Value Event Creation Mvi4Gapc (Ansi Mvi4)
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Table 218: MVGAPC Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Q1 status BOOLEAN Q2 status BOOLEAN Q3 status BOOLEAN Q4 status BOOLEAN Q5 status BOOLEAN Q6 status BOOLEAN Q7 status BOOLEAN Q8 status 3.20.8.5 MVGAPC Settings Table 219: MVGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 238: Analog Value Event Creation With Scaling Sca4Gapc (Ansi Sca4)
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.20.9.3 MVI4GAPC Functionality The integer value event creation function MVI4GAPC is used for creation of the events from the integer values. The integer input value is received via IN1...4 input. The integer output value is available on OUT1...4 output. The integer input range is from –2147483648 to 2147483647.
Page 239 2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.20.10.2 SCA4GAPC Function block Figure 126: SCA4GAPC Function block 3.20.10.3 SCA4GAPC Functionality The analog value event creation with scaling function SCA4GAPC is used for scaling the analog value. It allows creating events from analog values. Scale ratio n The analog value received via the AIn_VALUE input is scaled with the setting.
Page 240: 16 Settable Real Values Setrgapc
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 223: SCA4GAPC Output signals Name Type Description AO1_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 1 after scaling AO2_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 2 after scaling AO3_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 3 after scaling AO4_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 4 after scaling 3.20.10.5 SCA4GAPC Settings Table 224: SCA4GAPC settings...
Page 241 2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.20.11.3 SETRGAPC Functionality The value of function outputs AO1_VALUE...AO16_VALUE can be set with settings value 1 ... Set value 16 . 3.20.11.4 SETRGAPC Signals Table 225: SETRGAPC Output signals Name Type Description AO1_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 1 AO2_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 2...
Page 242: 16 Settable 32-Bit Integer Values Seti32Gapc
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A IEC name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Set value 10 –2000000.000...200 0.001 Set value for analog value 10 0000.000 Set value 11 –2000000.000...200 0.001 Set value for analog value 11 0000.000 Set value 12 –2000000.000...200 0.001 Set value for analog value 12 0000.000...
Page 243 2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.20.12.4 SETI32GAPC Signals Table 227: SETI32GAPC Output signals Name Type Description IO1_VALUE INT32 Integer value 1 IO2_VALUE INT32 Integer value 2 IO3_VALUE INT32 Integer value 3 IO4_VALUE INT32 Integer value 4 IO5_VALUE INT32 Integer value 5 IO6_VALUE INT32 Integer value 6...
Page 244: Generic Control Points Spcgapc (Ansi Spcg)
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A IEC name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Set value 13 –2147483648...2147 Set value for integer value 13 483647 Set value 14 –2147483648...2147 Set value for integer value 14 483647 Set value 15 –2147483648...2147 Set value for integer value 15 483647 Set value 16 –2147483648...2147...
Page 245 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Loc Rem restriction setting is used for enabling or disabling the restriction for Loc Rem restriction is "True", as it is by SPCGAPC to follow the R/L button state. If default, the local or remote control operations are accepted according to the R/L button state.
Page 246 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point IN10 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point IN11...
Page 247 2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.20.13.5 SPCGAPC Settings Table 231: SPCGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Loc Rem restriction 1=True Local remote switch restriction 0=False 1=True Operation mode -1=Off Operation mode for generic con- 0=Pulsed trol point 1=Toggle/Persistent -1=Off...
Page 248 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 1=Toggle/Persistent -1=Off Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGAPC1 Output 8 Generic control point description Operation mode -1=Off Operation mode for generic con- 0=Pulsed trol point 1=Toggle/Persistent -1=Off...
Page 249: Hotline Tag Hltgapc
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGAPC1 Output 16 Generic control point description 3.20.14 Hotline tag HLTGAPC 3.20.14.1 HLTGAPC Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification...
Page 250 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A TAG_ON_OFF Local Local command TAG_ON Active TAG_OFF TAG_SOURCE Remote Remote command Remote tag mode Figure 132: Functional module diagram HLTGAPC Local tag Local tag is activated or deactivated on rising edge detection of TAG_ON_OFF input or with a local command from the LHMI when the protection relay is in local mode. If a rising edge tag is detected locally, and the status of the nonvolatile variable TAG_SOURCE is “None”, the tag is locally activated.
Page 251 2NGA002468 A Basic functions In order to operate correctly, HLTGAPC must be properly configured with Application Configuration. The TAG_ON and TAG_OFF outputs are connected where they can block or enable any reclosing that is configured. Typically, TAG_ON can be used on a recloser function block to inhibit reclosing and TAG_OFF can be used on a circuit breaker function block to enable closing.
Page 252: Voltage Switch Vmswi (Ansi Vswi)
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 5=off Remote tag mode 1=Untag Rem only Deactivation mode 1=Untag Rem only for remotely set 2=Untag Loc or hotline tag 3.20.14.8 HLTGAPC Monitored data Table 235: HLTGAPC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 253 2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.20.15.3 VMSWI Functionality The voltage switch function VMSWI performs the switching function between up to four voltage groups (Bus1, Bus 2, Bus 3 and Bus 4) or between redundant SMV measurements. Residual voltage input can be optional and depends on the application configuration.
Page 254 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.20.15.5 VMSWI Operation principle Operation setting. The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are "on" and "off". For this function, the setting is hidden and fixed to "on". The switch logic depends on inputs SWITCH_TO2, SWITCH_TO3 and SWITCH_TO4. Source 1 is selected as default and switching is done on increased priority.
Page 255: Current Switch Cmswi
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Name Type Default Description U3P4 SIGNAL Three-phase voltages URES1 SIGNAL Residual voltage 1 URES2 SIGNAL Residual voltage 2 URES3 SIGNAL Residual voltage 3 URES4 SIGNAL Residual voltage 4 SWITCH_TO2 BOOLEAN 0=False Switch to source 2 SWITCH_TO3 BOOLEAN 0=False Switch to source 3...
Page 256 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.20.16.2 CMSWI Function block Figure 134: CMSWI Function block 3.20.16.3 CMSWI Functionality The current switch function CMSWI performs the switching function between up to four current groups (Bus1, Bus 2, Bus 3 and Bus 4) or between redundant SMV measurements.
Page 257 2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.20.16.5 CMSWI Operation principle Operation setting. The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are "on" and "off". For this function, the setting is hidden and fixed to "on". The switch logic depends on inputs SWITCH_TO2, SWITCH_TO3 and SWITCH_TO4. Source 1 is selected as default and switching is done on increased priority.
Page 258: Generic Up-Down Counter Udfcnt
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Default Description I3P4 SIGNAL Three-phase currents IRES1 SIGNAL Residual current 1 IRES2 SIGNAL Residual current 2 IRES3 SIGNAL Residual current 3 IRES4 SIGNAL Residual current 4 SWITCH_TO2 BOOLEAN 0=False Switch to source 2 SWITCH_TO3 BOOLEAN 0=False Switch to source 3...
Page 259 2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.20.17.2 UDFCNT Function block Figure 135: UDFCNT Function block 3.20.17.3 UDFCNT Functionality The Generic up-down counter function UDFCNT counts up or down for each positive edge of the corresponding inputs. The counter value output can be reset to zero or preset to some other value if required.
Page 260: Current Sum Cmsum (Ansi Csum)
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A The function also provides status outputs UPCNT_STS and DNCNT_STS. The UPCNT_STS is set to "True" when the CNT_VAL is greater than or equal to the setting Counter load value. DNCNT_STS is set to "True" when the CNT_VAL is zero. The RESET input is used for resetting the function.
Page 261 2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.20.18 Current sum CMSUM (ANSI CSUM) 3.20.18.1 CMSUM Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Current sum CMSUM CSUM CSUM 3.20.18.2 CMSUM Function block Figure 137: CMSUM Function block 3.20.18.3 CMSUM Functionality The current sum function CMSUM is a phase-by-phase specific summing function for two current triplets.
Page 262 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.20.18.4 CMSUM Analog channel configuration CMSUM has two analog group inputs which must be properly configured, that is, both ILTCTR function blocks connected to these inputs must have the same primary current setting value. Table 251: Analog inputs Input Description I3P1...
Page 263: Controllable Gate, 8 Channels Gategapc
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.20.19 Controllable gate, 8 channels GATEGAPC 3.20.19.1 GATEGAPC Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Controllable gate, 8 channels GATEGAPC GATEGAPC GATEGAPC 3.20.19.2 GATEGAPC Function block Figure 139: GATEGAPC Function block 3.20.19.3 GATEGAPC Functionality Controllable gate function GATEGAPC can pass each input IN1...IN8 to output...
Page 264: Programmable Buttons Fkeyggio (Ansi Fkey)
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 255: GATEGAPC Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Q1 status BOOLEAN Q2 status BOOLEAN Q3 status BOOLEAN Q4 status BOOLEAN Q5 status BOOLEAN Q6 status BOOLEAN Q7 status BOOLEAN Q8 status 3.20.19.5 GATEGAPC Settings Table 256: GATEGAPC settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 265 2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.20.20.1 FKEYGGIO Function block FKEYGGIO1 Figure 140: FKEYGGIO Function block 3.20.20.2 FKEYGGIO Functionality The programmable function block FKEYGGIO is a simple interface between the panel and the application. The user input from the buttons available on the front panel is transferred to the assigned functionality and the corresponding LED is turned ON/OFF for indication.
Page 266: Programmable Buttons (4 Buttons) Fkey4Ggio (Ansi Fkey4Ggio)
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False LED 8 BOOLEAN 0=False LED 9 BOOLEAN 0=False LED 10 BOOLEAN 0=False LED 11 BOOLEAN 0=False LED 12 BOOLEAN 0=False LED 13 BOOLEAN 0=False LED 14 BOOLEAN 0=False LED 15 BOOLEAN 0=False LED 16...
Page 267 2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.20.21.1 FKEY4GGIO Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Programmable but- FKEY4GGIO FKEY4GGIO FKEY4GGIO tons (4 buttons) 3.20.21.2 FKEY4GGIO Function block FKEY4GGIO1 Figure 141: FKEY4GGIO Function block 3.20.21.3 FKEY4GGIO Functionality The Programmable buttons function FKEY4GGIO is a simple interface between the panel and the application.
Page 268 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A FKEY4GGIO Output signals Table 260: FKEY4GGIO Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN KEY 1 BOOLEAN KEY 2 BOOLEAN KEY 3 BOOLEAN KEY 4 3.20.21.6 FKEY4GGIO Settings Table 261: FKEY4GGIO Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default...
Page 269: Standard Logic Operators
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.21 Standard logic operators 3.21.1 OR gate with two inputs OR, six inputs OR6 and twenty inputs OR20 3.21.1.1 OR, OR6 and OR20 Function block Figure 142: OR, OR6 and OR20 Function block 3.21.1.2 OR, OR6 and OR20 Functionality OR, OR6 and OR20 are used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables.
Page 270 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 263: OR6 Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN Input signal 1 BOOLEAN Input signal 2 BOOLEAN Input signal 3 BOOLEAN Input signal 4 BOOLEAN Input signal 5 BOOLEAN Input signal 6 Table 264: OR20 Input signals Name Type Default...
Page 271: And Gate With Two Inputs And, Six Inputs And6 And Twenty Inputs And20
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Table 267: OR20 Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output signal 3.21.1.4 Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600. 3.21.2 AND gate with two inputs AND, six inputs AND6 and twenty inputs AND20 3.21.2.1 AND, AND6 and AND20 Function block...
Page 272 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 269: AND6 Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN Input signal 1 BOOLEAN Input signal 2 BOOLEAN Input signal 3 BOOLEAN Input signal 4 BOOLEAN Input signal 5 BOOLEAN Input signal 6 Table 270: AND20 Input signals Name Type Default...
Page 273: Xor Gate With Two Inputs Xor
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Table 273: AND20 Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output signal 3.21.2.4 Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600. 3.21.3 XOR gate with two inputs XOR 3.21.3.1 XOR Function block Figure 144: XOR Function block 3.21.3.2 XOR Functionality...
Page 274: Not Function Block
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.21.4 NOT gate NOT 3.21.4.1 NOT Function block Figure 145: NOT Function block 3.21.4.2 NOT Functionality NOT is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables. NOT inverts the input signal. 3.21.4.3 NOT Signals Table 276: NOT Input signal Name Type Default...
Page 275: Falling Edge Detector F_Trig
2NGA002468 A Basic functions R_TRIG detects the transition from FALSE to TRUE at the CLK input. When the rising edge is detected, the element assigns the output to TRUE. At the next execution round, the output is returned to FALSE despite the state of the input. 3.21.5.3 R_TRIG Signals Table 278: R_TRIG Input signals...
Page 276: Switching Device Status Decoder Close Position T_Pos_Cl, Open Position T_Pos_Op And Ok Status T_Pos_Ok
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 281: F_TRIG Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output signal 3.21.6.4 Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600. 3.21.7 Switching device status decoder CLOSE position T_POS_CL, OPEN position T_POS_OP and OK status T_POS_OK 3.21.7.1 CLOSE Function block...
Page 277: Sr Flip-Flop, Volatile Sr
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Table 284: T_POS_OP Input signals Name Type Default Description Double binary Input signal Table 285: T_POS_OK Input signals Name Type Default Description Double binary Input signal Table 286: T_POS_CL Output signals Name Type Description CLOSE BOOLEAN Output signal Table 287: T_POS_OP Output signals Name...
Page 278: Rs Flip-Flop, Volatile Rs
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 289: Truth table for SR flip-flop 3.21.8.3 SR Signals Table 290: SR Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q output when BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q output when set Table 291: SR Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 279: Mathematical Operators
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Table 292: Truth table for RS flip-flop 3.21.9.3 RS Signals Table 293: RS Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q output when BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q output when set Table 294: RS Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 280: Real Division Divr
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A REAL_OUT = REAL_IN1 + REAL_IN2 If the value of the sum is outside the range, then the output quality is set as bad and VALID is set to FALSE. The minimum negative sum value is restricted to –2097152.000 and the maximum positive sum value is restricted to 2097152.000.
Page 281: Real Multiplication Mulr
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.22.2.3 DIVR Signals Table 297: DIVR Input signals Name Type Default Description REAL_IN1 FLOAT32 Real input 1 REAL_IN2 FLOAT32 Real input 2 Table 298: DIVR Output signals Name Type Description REAL_OUT Real output VALID BOOLEAN Output validity 3.22.3 Real multiplication MULR 3.22.3.1...
Page 282: Real Subtraction Subr
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 300: MULR Output signals Name Type Description REAL_OUT FLOAT32 Real output VALID BOOLEAN Output validity 3.22.4 Real subtraction SUBR 3.22.4.1 SUBR Function block Figure 154: SUBR Function block 3.22.4.2 SUBR Functionality The real subtraction function SUBR subtracts input REAL_IN2 from REAL_IN1. SUBR executes the equation REAL_OUT = REAL_IN1 –...
Page 283 2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.22.5.1 EQR Function block Figure 155: EQR Function block 3.22.5.2 EQR Functionality The real equal comparator function EQR compares the real input REAL_IN1 with the real input REAL_IN2 and activates the binary output OUT if REAL_IN1 is within the region of REAL_IN2 + TOLR and REAL_IN2 –TOLR, that is, if REAL_IN1 ≥...
Page 284 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 304: EQR Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output value REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 285: Real Not Equal Comparator Ner
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.22.6 Real not equal comparator NER 3.22.6.1 NER Function block Figure 157: NER Function block 3.22.6.2 NER Functionality The real not equal comparator function NER compares the real input REAL_IN1 with the real input REAL_IN2 and activates the binary output OUT if REAL_IN1 is outside the region of REAL_INT2 + TOLR and REAL_IN2 - TOLR.
Page 286: Real Greater Than Or Equal Comparator Ger
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.22.6.3 NER Signals Table 305: NER Input signals Name Type Default Description REAL_IN1 FLOAT32 Real input 1 REAL_IN2 FLOAT32 Real input 2 TOLR FLOAT32 Tolerance for compar- ison Table 306: NER Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output value 3.22.7...
Page 287: Real Less Than Or Equal Comparator Ler
2NGA002468 A Basic functions GER function blocks do not have the hysteresis feature. Oscillating outputs should be avoided when comparing analog signals that have closely varying values. 3.22.7.3 GER Signals Table 307: GER Input signals Name Type Default Description REAL_IN1 FLOAT32 Real input 1 REAL_IN2...
Page 288: Real Maximum Value Selector Max3R
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A REAL_IN2+TOLR Equal region REAL_IN2 Lesser than region Min -2097152.000 Figure 162: Region of LER comparison 3.22.8.3 LER Signals Table 309: LER Input signals Name Type Default Description REAL_IN1 FLOAT32 Real input 1 REAL_IN2 FLOAT32 Real input 2 TOLR FLOAT32 Tolerance for compar-...
Page 289: Real Minimum Value Selector Min3R
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.22.9.3 MAX3R Signals Table 311: MAX3R Input signals Name Type Default Description REAL_IN1 FLOAT32 Real input value 1 REAL_IN2 FLOAT32 Real input value 2 REAL_IN3 FLOAT32 Real input value 3 Table 312: MAX3R Output signals Name Type Description REAL_OUT...
Page 290: Minimum, Maximum And Average Value Calculator Minmaxave12R
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.22.11 Minimum, maximum and average value calculator MINMAXAVE12R 3.22.11.1 MINMAXAVE12R Function block Figure 165: MINMAXAVE12R Function block 3.22.11.2 MINMAXAVE12R Functionality The minimum, maximum and average value calculator function MINMAXAVE12R calculates the aforementioned values from one to twelve analog values. Disconnected inputs and inputs whose quality is bad are ignored.
Page 291 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Name Type Default Description REAL_IN8 FLOAT32 Real input value 8 REAL_IN9 FLOAT32 Real input value 9 REAL_IN10 FLOAT32 Real input value 10 REAL_IN11 FLOAT32 Real input value 11 REAL_IN12 FLOAT32 Real input value 12 Table 316: MINMAXAVE12R Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 292: Real Switch Selector Switchr
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.22.12 Real switch selector SWITCHR 3.22.12.1 SWITCHR Function block Figure 166: SWITCHR Function block 3.22.12.2 SWITCHR Functionality The real switch selector function SWITCHR is operated by the CTL_SW input and selects the output value REAL_OUT between the REAL_IN1 and REAL_IN2 inputs. Table 317: SWITCHR CTL_SW value REAL_OUT value...
Page 293: Integer 32-Bit Switch Selector Switchi32
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.22.13 Integer 32-bit switch selector SWITCHI32 3.22.13.1 SWITCHI32 Function block Figure 167: SWITCHI32 Function block 3.22.13.2 SWITCHI32 Functionality The integer 32-bit switch selector function SWITCHI32 is operated by the CTL_SW input, which selects the output value INT32_OUT between the INT32_IN1 and INT32_IN2 inputs.
Page 294: Load Profile Ldprlrc (Ansi Loadprof)
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.24 Load profile LDPRLRC (ANSI LOADPROF) 3.24.1 LDPRLRC Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Load profile recorder LDPRLRC LOADPROF LOADPROF 3.24.2 LDPRLRC Function block Figure 168: LDPRLRC Function block 3.24.3 LDPRLRC Functionality The protection relay is provided with a load profile recorder.
Page 295 2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.24.3.1 LDPRLRC Quantities Table 323: Signals supported by the load profile recorder Function Signal Description CMMXU I_DMD_A Demand value of IL1 current I_DMD_B Demand value of IL2 current I_DMD_C Demand value of IL3 current PEMMXU S_DMD Demand value of apparent power P_DMD Demand value of active power...
Page 296 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Table 324: Recording capability in days with different settings Demand interval minute minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes Amount of quantities Recording capability in days 15.2 75.8 151.6 227.4 454.9 909.7 2729.2 11.4 56.9 113.7 170.6 341.1 682.3 2046.9...
Page 297: Ldprlrc Configuration
2NGA002468 A Basic functions Figure 169: Load profile record file naming 3.24.3.4 LDPRLRC Clearing of record Reset load profile rec via HMI, The load profile record can be cleared with communication or the ACT input in PCM600. Clearing of the record is allowed only on the engineer and administrator authorization levels.
Page 298: Signals
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 170: Example of a load profile record ACT configuration The memory consumption of load profile record is supervised, and indicated with two signals MEM_WARN and MEM_ALARM, which could be used to notify the customer that recording should be backlogged by reading the recorded data from the protection relay.
Page 299: Ethernet Channel Supervision Functions
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.24.7 LDPRLRC Monitored data Table 327: LDPRLRC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Rec. memory used INT32 0...100 How much recording memory is currently used 3.25 Ethernet channel supervision functions The protection relay offers a bandwidth rate limiting functionality to limit the Ethernet/TCP network traffic.
Page 300 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Name Values (Range) Description "PRP", value is TRUE if the protection relay is receiving redundancy supervision frames. Otherwise the value is FALSE. REDCHLIV BOOLEAN Status of redundant Ethernet channel LAN Redundant mode is set to "HSR" or B When "PRP", value is TRUE if the protection relay is receiving redundancy supervision frames.
Page 301: Ethernet Channel Supervision Schlcch
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.25.1.4 RCHLCCH Settings Table 329: RCHLCCH Settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Redundant mode Mode selection for Ethernet None switch on redundant commu- nication modules. The "None" mode is used with normal and Self-healing Ethernet topologies. Filter Mode A_B Filtering selection for message types...
Page 302 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.25.2.1 SCHLCCH Function block Figure 172: SCHLCCH Function block 3.25.2.2 SCHLCCH Functionality Ethernet channel supervision SCHLCCH represents X1/LAN, X2/LAN and X3/LAN Ethernet channels. An unused Ethernet port can be set "Off" with the setting Configuration > Communication > Ethernet > Rear port(s) > Port x Mode. This setting closes the port from software, disabling the Ethernet communication in that port.
Page 303 2NGA002468 A Basic functions Name Type Description value is TRUE if the port is receiving Ethernet frames. Otherwise the value is FALSE. LNK3LIV BOOLEAN Link status of Ethernet port X3/LAN Value is "Up" or "Down". 3.25.2.4 SCHLCCH Settings Table 334: SCHLCCH Settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 304: Modbus Master Function Blocks
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Def. limit count 0...1000000 Default rate limit exceed count GOOSE limit alarm FALSE / TRUE FALSE Goose rate limit exceed alarm SMV limit alarm FALSE / TRUE FALSE Sampled measured values limit alarm Ucast limit alarm FALSE / TRUE...
Page 305 2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.26.1.4 MMVGAPC Signals Table 336: MMVGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0 = False IN1 status BOOLEAN 0 = False IN2 status BOOLEAN 0 = False IN3 status BOOLEAN 0 = False IN4 status BOOLEAN 0 = False IN5 status...
Page 306: Received Modbus 32-Bit Integer Value Information Function Block Mmvi4Gapc
Basic functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Type IED Values PC Values (Defaults) Description Description MMVGAPC1 Q5 Output 5 Description Description MMVGAPC1 Q6 Output 6 Description Description MMVGAPC1 Q7 Output 7 Description Description MMVGAPC1 Q8 Output 8 Description 3.26.2 Received Modbus 32-bit integer value information function block MMVI4GAPC 3.26.2.1 MMVI4GAPC Identification...
Page 307: Received Modbus Measured Value Information Function Block Mmvf4Gapc
2NGA002468 A Basic functions 3.26.2.4 MMVI4GAPC Signals Table 339: MMVI4GAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description INT32 Integer input value 1 INT32 Integer input value 2 INT32 Integer input value 3 INT32 Integer input value 4 Table 340: MMVI4GAPC Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 308 Basic functions 2NGA002468 A 3.26.3.3 MMVF4GAPC Functionality The received Modbus measured value information function, MMVF4GAPC, is used to retrieving 32-bit float information from a slave unit’s register. Input assignment is done in CMT. Data from Modbus areas x3 and x4 can be retrieved from slave units into this block’s inputs.
Page 309: Protection Functions
2NGA002468 A Protection functions Protection functions Three-phase current protection 4.1.1 Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection PHxPTOC (ANSI 51P-1, 51P-2, 50P/51P) 4.1.1.1 PHxPTOC Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase non-directional over- PHLPTOC 3I> 51P-1 current protection, low stage Three-phase non-directional over- PHHPTOC...
Page 310 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, timers or the function itself. 4.1.1.4 PHxPTOC Analog input configuration PHxPTOC has one analog group input which must be properly configured. Table 343: Analog inputs Input Description Three-phase currents...
Page 311 2NGA002468 A Protection functions The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function (INRPHAR) is connected to the ENA_MULT input. Figure 178: Start value behavior with ENA_MULT input activated Phase selection logic If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the measured current exceeds the setting.
Page 312 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse time depends on the reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation and the value of START_DUR.
Page 313 IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. One curve is for rectifier bridge protection. In addition to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable.
Page 314 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Operating curve type PHLPTOC PHHPTOC (18) RI type (19) RD type (20) UK rectifier PHIPTOC supports only definite time characteristic. Chapter 11 General function For a detailed description of timers, see block features in this manual. Table 346: Reset time characteristics supported by different stages Reset curve type PHLPTOC...
Page 315 2NGA002468 A Protection functions • Instantaneous PHIPTOC PHLPTOC is used for overcurrent protection. The function contains several types of time-delay characteristics. PHHPTOC and PHIPTOC are used for fast clearance of very high overcurrent situations. Transformer overcurrent protection The purpose of transformer overcurrent protection is to operate as main protection, when differential protection is not used.
Page 316 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 179: Example of traditional time selective transformer overcurrent protection The operating times of the main and backup overcurrent protection of the above scheme become quite long, this applies especially in the busbar faults and also in the transformer LV-terminal faults.
Page 317 2NGA002468 A Protection functions this case, the two lowest stages of overcurrent protection are in operation simultaneously. In case B, a communication failure causes a situation where the line differential function is not able to work properly. Unblocking of the two highest overcurrent protection stages releases these functions to protect the line against overcurrents and short-circuits.
Page 318 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A performance of the proposed overcurrent protections can be summarized as seen in the table. Table 347: Proposed functionality of numerical transformer and busbar overcur- rent protection. DT = definite time, IDMT = inverse definite minimum time O/C-stage Operating char.
Page 319 2NGA002468 A Protection functions The operating times of the time selective stages are very short, because the grading margins between successive protection stages can be kept short. This is mainly due to the advanced measuring principle allowing a certain degree of CT saturation, good operating accuracy and short retardation times of the numerical units.
Page 320 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 182: Functionality of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection The coordination plan is an effective tool to study the operation of time selective operation characteristics. All the points mentioned earlier, required to define the overcurrent protection parameters, can be expressed simultaneously in a coordination plan.
Page 321 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 183: Example coordination of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection 4.1.1.9 Signals PHLPTOC Input signals Table 348: PHLPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN...
Page 322 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A PHIPTOC Input signals Table 350: PHIPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for cur- rent multiplier PHLPTOC Output signals Table 351: PHLPTOC Output signals Name Type...
Page 323 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Time multiplier 0.025...15.000 0.005 1.000 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves Operate delay time 20...300000 Operate delay time Operating curve 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time 1=ANSI Ext. inv. type delay curve type 2=ANSI Very inv.
Page 324 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 357: PHLPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate 20...60000 Minimum operate time time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Measurement 2=DFT Selects used meas- 1=RMS mode urement mode...
Page 325 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 0.01 2.00 Parameter C for customer program- mable curve Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 0.01 29.10 Parameter D for customer program- mable curve Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 Parameter E for customer program-...
Page 326 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off PHHPTOC Monitored data Table 366: PHHPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time PHHPTOC Enum Status 1=on...
Page 327 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Characteristic Value Start = 2 × set Fault 13 ms 15 ms 18 ms value Start = 10 × set Fault value PHHPTOC and 23 ms 26 ms 29 ms PHLPTOC: = 2 × set Start Fault value Reset time...
Page 328: Three-Phase Non-Directional Instantaneous Only Overcurrent Protection Phipioc (Ansi 50P)
Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 370: PHHPTOC Technical revision history Product Technical Change connectivi revision ty level PCL1 Added support for definite operate time mode selection (global Operate delay time to 20 ms. setting). Minimum for Table 371: PHIPTOC Technical revision history Product Technical Change...
Page 329 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Table 372: Analog inputs Input Description Three phase currents 4.1.2.5 PHIPIOC Operation principle Operation setting is used to enable or disable the function. When selected "On" the function is enabled and respectively "Off" means function is disabled. The operation of PHIPIOC can be described by using a module diagram.
Page 330 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A PHIPIOC Input signals Table 373: PHIPIOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for cur- rent multiplier PHIPIOC Output signals Table 374: PHIPIOC Output signals Name Type...
Page 331: Three-Phase Non-Directional Long-Time Overcurrent Protection Phltptoc (Ansi 51Lt)
2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.1.2.10 PHIPIOC Technical data Table 378: PHIPIOC technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured cur- rent: fn ±2 Hz ±1.5% of set value or ±0.002 xIn (at currents in the range of 0.1…10 xIn) ±5.0% of the set value (at currents in the range of 10…40 xIn)
Page 332 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.1.3.1 PHLTPTOC Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase non-di- PHLTPTOC 3I> 51LT rectional long time overcurrent protec- tion 4.1.3.2 PHLTPTOC Function block Figure 186: PHLTPTOC Function block 4.1.3.3 PHLTPTOC Functionality The three-phase long-time overcurrent protection 51LT is used as one-phase, two- phase or three-phase non-directional overcurrent and short-circuit protection for...
Page 333 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.1.3.5 PHLTPTOC Operation principle Operation setting. The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of PHLTPTOC can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 334 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 188: Start value behavior with ENA_MULT input activated Phase selection logic If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the measured current exceeds the setting. If the phase Num of start phases setting, the phase selection logic information matches the activates the timer module.
Page 335 2NGA002468 A Protection functions value of START_DUR. The START output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed. The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during the drop-off situation.
Page 336 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 381: Timer characteristics supported Operating curve type 51LT (1) Long Time Extremely Inverse (2) Long Time Very Inverse (3) Long Time Inverse (4) Long Time Moderately Inverse (5) Long Definite Time (6) Very Long Time Extremely Inverse (7) Very Long Time Very Inverse (8) Very Long Time Inverse (9) Long Time Normal Inverse...
Page 337 2NGA002468 A Protection functions PHLTPTOC Output signals Table 384: PHLTPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.1.3.10 PHLTPTOC Settings Table 385: PHLTPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.05...5.00 0.01 0.05 Start value...
Page 338 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 0.01 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable curve Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 0.01 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable curve Curve parameter 0.0...1.0 Parameter E for customer E<entry>...
Page 339: Three-Phase Directional Overcurrent Protection Dphxpdoc (Ansi 67P/51P-1, 67P/51P-2)
2NGA002468 A Protection functions Characteristic Value Reset ratio Typically 0.96 Retardation time <30 ms <35 ms Operate time accuracy in definite ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms time mode Operate time accuracy in inverse ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms time mode Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression...
Page 340 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.1.4.2 DPHxPDOC Function block Figure 189: DPHxPDOC Function block 4.1.4.3 DPHxPDOC Functionality The three-phase directional overcurrent protection function DPHxPDOC is used as one-phase, two-phase or three-phase directional overcurrent and short-circuit protection for feeders. DPHxPDOC starts up when the value of the current exceeds the set limit and directional criterion is fulfilled.
Page 341 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Improper analog channel configuration causes a validation error if the analog channels are not completely configured or they do not match with certain settings. For troubleshooting, check the contents of this chapter and also the preprocessing blocks in this document.
Page 342 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Allow Non Dir to "True", the non-directional operation is allowed when the value of the directional information is invalid. Characteristic angle setting is used to turn the directional characteristic. The Characteristic angle should be chosen in such a way that all the faults value of in the operating direction are seen in the operating zone and all the faults in the opposite direction are seen in the non-operating zone.
Page 343 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 191: Operating zones at minimum magnitude levels The DIRECTION output indicates on which operating sector the current is measured. The value combines phase-specific directions which are available in monitored data as DIR_A, DIR_B and DIR_C. Level detector Start value .
Page 344 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 192: Start value behavior with ENA_MULT input activated Phase selection logic If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector and the directional calculation, the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the measured Num of start current exceeds the setting.
Page 345 2NGA002468 A Protection functions causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse time depends on the reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation and the value of START_DUR.
Page 346 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.1.4.7 DPHxPDOC Directional overcurrent characteristics The forward and reverse sectors are defined separately. The forward operation area Min forward angle and Max forward angle settings. The reverse is limited with the Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle settings. operation area is limited with the The sector limits are always given as positive degree values.
Page 347 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Criterion for per phase direction information The value for DIR_A/_B/_C The ANGLE_X is in the reverse sector 2 = backward (The ANGLE_X is in both forward and reverse sectors, that is, 3 = both when the sectors are overlapping) Table 397: Momentary phase combined direction value for monitored data view Criterion for phase combined direction information The value for DIRECTION...
Page 348 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A In an example case of the phasors in a single-phase earth fault where the faulted phase is phase A, the angle difference between the polarizing quantity U operating quantity I is marked as φ. In the self-polarization method, there is no need to rotate the polarizing quantity.
Page 349 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Cross-polarizing as polarizing quantity Table 399: Equations for calculating angle difference for cross-polarizing method Faulted Used Used Angle difference phases fault polarizi current voltage ANGLE A ϕ ϕ ϕ (Equation 13) ANGLE B ϕ ϕ ϕ (Equation 14) ANGLE C ϕ...
Page 350 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 196: Single-phase earth fault, phase A In an example of the phasors in a two-phase short-circuit failure where the fault is between the phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity U and operating quantity I marked as φ.
Page 351 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 197: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C The equations are valid when network rotating direction is counter- clockwise, that is, ABC. If the network rotating direction is reversed, 180 degrees is added to the calculated angle difference. This is done Phase rotation .
Page 352 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 198: Phasors in a single-phase earth fault, phases A-N, and two-phase short circuit, phases B and C, when the actuating polarizing quantity is the negative- sequence voltage -U2 Positive sequence voltage as polarizing quantity Table 400: Equations for calculating angle difference for positive-sequence quan- tity polarizing method Faulted Used...
Page 353 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Faulted Used Used Angle difference phases fault polarizi current voltage B - C ANGLE B ϕ ϕ ϕ − − − − (Equation 24) C - A ANGLE C ϕ − ϕ − − ϕ (Equation 25) Figure 199: Phasors in a single-phase earth fault, phase A to ground, and a two- phase short circuit, phases B-C, are short-circuited when the polarizing quantity is the positive-sequence voltage U 1...
Page 354 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 200: Examples of network rotating direction 4.1.4.8 DPHxPDOC Application DPHxPDOC is used as short-circuit protection in three-phase distribution or sub transmission networks operating at 50 or 60 Hz. In radial networks, phase overcurrent protection relays are often sufficient for the short circuit protection of lines, transformers and other equipment.
Page 355 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 201: Overcurrent protection of parallel lines using directional protection relays DPHxPDOC can be used for parallel operating transformer applications. In these applications, there is a possibility that the fault current can also be fed from the LV- side up to the HV-side.
Page 356 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 203: Closed ring network topology where feeding lines are protected with directional overcurrent protection relays 4.1.4.9 Signals DPHLPDOC Input signals Table 401: DPHLPDOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents SIGNAL Three-phase voltages BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False...
Page 357 2NGA002468 A Protection functions DPHHPDOC Input signals Table 402: DPHHPDOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents SIGNAL Three-phase voltages BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for cur- rent multiplier NON_DIR BOOLEAN...
Page 358 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operate delay time 35...300000 Operate delay time Operating curve 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time 1=ANSI Ext. inv. type delay curve type 2=ANSI Very inv. 3=ANSI Norm. inv. 4=ANSI Mod. inv. 5=ANSI Def.
Page 359 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Table 407: DPHLPDOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Num of start pha- 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases 1=1 out of 3 required for oper- 2=2 out of 3 ate activation...
Page 360 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 3=ANSI Norm. inv. 5=ANSI Def. Time 9=IEC Norm. inv. 10=IEC Very inv. 12=IEC Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time 17=Programmable Operate delay time 35...300000 Operate delay time Characteristic an- -179...180 Characteristic an- Max forward angle 0...90...
Page 361 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 3=3 out of 3 Table 412: DPHHPDOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Minimum operate 35...60000 Minimum operate time time for IDMT curves...
Page 362 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description 4=test/blocked 5=off DPHHPDOC Monitored data Table 414: DPHHPDOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time DIR_A Enum Direction phase A 0=unknown 1=forward 2=backward...
Page 363 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Characteristic Value ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Phase angle: ±2° DPHHPDOC Current: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I (at currents in the range of 0.1…10 × I ±5.0% of the set value (at currents in the range of 10…40 ×...
Page 364: Three-Phase Thermal Protection For Feeders, Cables And Distribution Transformers T1Pttr (Ansi 49F)
Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 417: DPHHPDOC Technical revision history Product Technical Change connectivi revision ty level PCL1 Added support for definite operate time mode selection (global Operate delay time and Minimum operate setting). Minimum for time changed to 35 ms. Step of Operate delay time to 5 ms. 4.1.5 Three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables and distribution transformers T1PTTR (ANSI 49F)
Page 365 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.1.5.4 T1PTTR Analog channel configuration T1PTTR has one analog group input which must be properly configured. Table 418: Analog inputs Input Description Three-phase currents See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. Improper analog channel configuration causes a validation error if the analog channels are not completely configured or they do not match with certain settings.
Page 366 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Temperature estimator The final temperature rise is calculated from the highest of the three-phase currents according to the expression: (Equation 26) the highest phase current Current reference Temperature rise The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature rise estimation, and the ambient temperature value used in the calculation is also available in the monitored data as TEMP_AMB in degrees.
Page 367 2NGA002468 A Protection functions There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current. This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation temperature: (Equation 28) Caused by the thermal overload protection function, there can be a lockout to reconnect the tripped circuit after operating.
Page 368 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.1.5.6 T1PTTR Application The lines and cables in the power system are constructed for a certain maximum load current level. If the current exceeds this level, the losses will be higher than expected. As a consequence, the temperature of the conductors will increase. If the temperature of the lines and cables reaches too high values, it can cause a risk of damages by, for example, the following ways: •...
Page 369 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Thermal Alarm BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN Thermal overload indicator. To inhibite reclose. 4.1.5.8 T1PTTR Settings Table 421: T1PTTR Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Env temperature -50...100 °C Ambient tempera- ture used when no external temper- ature measurement...
Page 370: Loss Of Phase, Undercurrent Phptuc (Ansi 37)
Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.1.5.9 T1PTTR Monitored data Table 425: T1PTTR Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description TEMP FLOAT32 -100.0...9999.9 °C The calculated temper- ature of the protected object TEMP_RL FLOAT32 0.00...99.99 The calculated temper- ature of the protected object relative to the operate level T_OPERATE...
Page 371 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.1.6.1 PHPTUC Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Loss of phase, undercurrent PHPTUC1 3I< 4.1.6.2 PHPTUC Function block Figure 206: PHPTUC Function block 4.1.6.3 PHPTUC Functionality The phase undercurrent protection function PHPTUC is used to detect an undercurrent that is considered as a fault condition.
Page 372 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.1.6.5 PHPTUC Operation principle Operation setting . The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of PHPTUC can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 373 2NGA002468 A Protection functions operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time , the operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated. The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time.
Page 374 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.1.6.8 PHPTUC Settings Table 431: PHPTUC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Current block value 0.00...0.50 0.01 0.10 Low current setting to block internally Start value 0.01...1.00 0.01 0.50 Current setting to start Operate delay time 50...200000...
Page 375: Three-Phase Non-Directional Overcurrent Protection With 1-Phase Trip Option Sphxptoc (Ansi 51P-1, 51P-2, 50P/51P)
2NGA002468 A Protection functions Characteristic Value Start time Typically <55 ms Reset time <40 ms Reset ratio Typically 1.04 Retardation time <35 ms Operate time accuracy in definite time mode mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms 4.1.6.11 PHPTUC Technical revision history Table 436: PHPTUC Technical revision history Product...
Page 376 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.1.7.2 SPHxPTOC Function block SPHLPTOC1 SPHHPTOC1 SPHIPTOC1 OPERATE OPERATE OPERATE START START START BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK OPERATE_A OPERATE_A OPERATE_A ENA_MULT ENA_MULT ENA_MULT OPERATE_B OPERATE_B OPERATE_B CB_OPR_MODE CB_OPR_MODE CB_OPR_MODE OPERATE_C OPERATE_C OPERATE_C START_A START_A START_A START_B START_B START_B START_C START_C...
Page 377: Level Detector
2NGA002468 A Protection functions The operation in either tripping mode can be described by using a module diagram Figure 209 (see ). Some modules have different functionality depending on whether the function is in one-phase or three-phase tripping mode. All the blocks in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 378 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Start value x Start value Mult Start value Figure 210: Start value behavior with ENA_MULT input activated Phase selection logic This logic is only active in three-phase operating mode (CB_OPR_MODE = 1 (three- phase)). If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the measured current exceeds the Num of start phases setting, the setting.
Page 379 2NGA002468 A Protection functions the drop-off situation continues, the reset timer is reset and the START output is deactivated. The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during the drop-off situation.
Page 380 IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable.
Page 381 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Operating curve type supported by SPHLPTOC SPHHPTOC 50P-1 50P-2 (-6) Recloser 6 (136) (-7) Recloser 7 (152) (-8) Recloser 8 (113) (-9) Recloser 8+ (111) (-10) Recloser 8* (-11) Recloser 9 (131) (-12) Recloser 11 (141) (-13) Recloser 13 (142) (-14) Recloser 14 (119) (-15) Recloser 15 (112)
Page 382 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A For a detailed description of timers, see the General function block features section in this manual. Reset curve type Supported by SPHLPTOC SPHHPTOC Note (1) Immediate Available for all reset time curves (2) Def time reset Available for all reset time curves (3) Inverse reset...
Page 383 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Transformer and busbar overcurrent protection with reverse blocking principle By implementing a full set of overcurrent protection stages and blocking channels between the protection stages of the incoming feeders, bus-tie and outgoing feeders, it is possible to speed up the operation of overcurrent protection in the busbar and transformer LV-side faults without impairing the selectivity.
Page 384 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A effects of switching inrush currents on the setting values can be reduced by using the relay logic, which recognizes the transformer energizing inrush current and blocks the operation or multiplies the current start value setting of the selected overcurrent stage with a predefined multiplier setting.
Page 385 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 212: Functionality of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection The coordination plan is an effective tool to study the operation of time selective operation characteristics. All the points mentioned earlier, required to define the overcurrent protection parameters, can be expressed simultaneously in a coordination plan.
Page 386 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 213: Example coordination of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection 4.1.7.9 Signals SPHLPTOC Input signals Table 441: SPHLPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False...
Page 387 2NGA002468 A Protection functions SPHIPTOC Input signals Table 443: SPHIPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier CB_OPR_MODE Enum 2=Single Phase Breaker operation mode SPHLPTOC Output signals Table 444: SPHLPTOC Output signals Name...
Page 388 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A SPHIPTOC Output signals Table 446: SPHIPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start OPERATE_A BOOLEAN Operate Phase A OPERATE_B BOOLEAN Operate Phase B OPERATE_C BOOLEAN Operate Phase C START_A BOOLEAN Start Phase A START_B BOOLEAN Start Phase B...
Page 389 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description -6=Recloser 6 -7=Recloser 7 -8=Recloser 8 -9=Recloser 8+ -10=Recloser 8* -11=Recloser 9 -12=Recloser 11 -13=Recloser 13 -14=Recloser 14 -15=Recloser 15 -16=Recloser 16 -17=Recloser 17 -18=Recloser 18 -19=Recloser A -20=Recloser B -21=Recloser C -22=Recloser D -23=Recloser E...
Page 390 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 449: SPHLPTOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Num of start pha- 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required for oper- 1=1 out of 3 ate activation 2=2 out of 3...
Page 391 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Table 452: SPHHPTOC Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type 2=Def time reset 3=Inverse reset Table 453: SPHHPTOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 392 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.1.7.11 Monitored data SPHLPTOC Monitored data Table 457: SPHLPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time SPHLPTOC Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off SPHHPTOC Monitored data Table 458: SPHHPTOC Monitored data Name Type...
Page 393 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Characteristic Value SPHIPTOC ±5.0% of the set value (at currents in the range of 10…40 × I 1, 2 Start time Minimum Typical Maximum SPHIPTOC: 16 ms 19 ms 25 ms = 2 × set Start Fault 12 ms 14 ms...
Page 394: Three-Phase Directional Overcurrent Protection With 1-Phase Trip Option Sdphlpdoc (Ansi 67P/51P-1)
Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 462: SPHHPTOC Technical revision history Technical Change revision Measurement mode “P-to-P + backup” replaced with “Peak-to-Peak” Table 463: SPHLPTOC & SPHHPTOC Technical revision history Technical Change revision Operate delay time Minimum and default values changed to 40 ms for the setting 4.1.8 Three-phase directional overcurrent protection with 1-...
Page 395 2NGA002468 A Protection functions SDPHLPDOC start when the value of the current exceeds the set limit and directional criterion is fulfilled. The operate time characteristics for low stage SDPHLPDOC can be selected to be either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT).
Page 396 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A U_A_AB DIRECTION U_B_BC FAULT_DIR U_C_CA Timer OPERATE Directional Phase calculation START selection logic OPERATE_A START_A NON_DIR Level Timer detector OPERATE_B ENA_MULT CB_OPR_MODE START_B Blocking BLOCK logic Timer OPERATE_C START_C Figure 215: Functional module diagram Directional calculation The directional calculation compares the current phasors to the polarizing phasor.
Page 397 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Characteristic opposite direction are seen in the non-operating zone. The value of angle depends on the network configuration. Reliable operation requires both the operating and polarizing quantities to exceed certain minimum amplitude levels. The minimum amplitude level for the operating Min Operate Current setting.
Page 398 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 216: Operating zones at minimum magnitude levels Level detector Start The measured phase currents are compared phase-wise with the set value .and, if enabled, the Start block value . If the measured value exceeds the set Start value , and is less than the Start block value , the level detector reports the start Start value setting to the phase selection logic.
Page 399 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Start value x Start value Mult Start value Figure 217: Start value behavior with ENA_MULT input activated Phase selection logic This logic is only active in three-phase operating mode (CB_OPR_MODE = 1 (three- phase)) . If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the measured current exceeds the Num of start phases setting, the setting.
Page 400 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A the drop-off situation continues, the reset timer is reset and the START output is deactivated. The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during the drop-off situation.
Page 401 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.1.8.7 SDPHLPDOC Directional overcurrent characteristics The forward and reverse sectors are defined separately. The forward operation area is limited with the Min forward angle and Max forward angle settings. The reverse Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle settings. operation area is limited with the The sector limits are always given as positive degree values.
Page 402 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 469: Momentary per phase direction value for monitored data view Criterion for per phase direction The value for DIR_A/_B/_C information The ANGLE_X is not in any of the defined sec- 0 = unknown tors, or the direction cannot be defined due too low amplitude The ANGLE_X is in the forward sector 1 = forward...
Page 403 2NGA002468 A Protection functions operating quantity I is marked as φ. In the self-polarization method, there is no need to rotate the polarizing quantity. Figure 219: Single-phase ground fault, phase A In an example case of a two-phase short-circuit failure where the fault is between phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity and operating quantity I in the self-polarizing method.
Page 404 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Cross-polarizing as polarizing quantity Table 472: Equations for calculating angle difference for cross-polarizing method Faulted Used Used Angle difference phases fault polarizing current voltage ANGLE A ANGLE B ANGLE C A - B ANGLE A B - C ANGLE B C - A ANGLE C...
Page 405 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 222: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C The equations are valid when network rotating direction is counterclockwise, that is, ABC. If the network rotating direction is reversed, 180 degrees is added to the calculated angle difference. This Phase rotation .
Page 406 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 223: Phasors in a single-phase ground fault, phases A-N, and two-phase short circuit, phases B and C, when the actuating polarizing quantity is the negative- sequence voltage -V2 Positive sequence voltage as polarizing quantity Table 473: Equations for calculating angle difference for positive-sequence quanti- ty polarizing method Faulted Used...
Page 407 2NGA002468 A Protection functions NETWORK ROTATION ABC NETWORK ROTATION ACB Figure 224: Phasors in a single-phase ground fault, phase A to ground, and a two- phase short circuit, phases B-C, are short-circuited when the polarizing quantity is the positive-sequence voltage V1 Network rotation direction Typically, the network rotating direction is counter-clockwise and defined as "ABC".
Page 408 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A NETWORK ROTATION ABC NETWORK ROTATION ACB Figure 225: Examples of network rotating direction 4.1.8.8 SDPHLPDOC Application SDPHLPDOC is used as short-circuit protection in three-phase distribution or sub transmission networks operating at 50 or 60 Hz. In radial networks, phase overcurrent protection relays are often sufficient for the short circuit protection of lines, transformers and other equipment.
Page 409 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 226: Overcurrent protection of parallel lines using directional protection relays SDPHLPDOC can be used for parallel operating transformer applications. In these applications, there is a possibility that the fault current can also be fed from the LV- side up to the HV-side.
Page 410 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 228: Closed ring network topology where feeding lines are protected with directional overcurrent protection relays 4.1.8.9 Signals SDPHLPDOC Input signals Table 474: SDPHLPDOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents SIGNAL Three-phase voltages BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False...
Page 411 2NGA002468 A Protection functions SDPHLPDOC Output signals Table 475: SDPHLPDOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start OPERATE_A BOOLEAN Operate Phase A OPERATE_B BOOLEAN Operate Phase B OPERATE_C BOOLEAN Operate Phase C START_A BOOLEAN Start Phase A START_B BOOLEAN Start Phase B...
Page 412 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description -9=Recloser 8+ -10=Recloser 8* -11=Recloser 9 -12=Recloser 11 -13=Recloser 13 -14=Recloser 14 -15=Recloser 15 -16=Recloser 16 -17=Recloser 17 -18=Recloser 18 -19=Recloser A -20=Recloser B -21=Recloser C -22=Recloser D -23=Recloser E -24=Recloser F -25-Recloser G -26=Recloser H...
Page 413 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Min reverse angle 0...90 Minimum phase angle in reverse direction Pol quantity 5=Cross pol Reference quantity used to determine fault di- 1=Self pol rection 4=Neg. seq. volt. 5=Cross pol 7=Pos.
Page 414 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description 3=both DIRECTION Enum Direction information 0=unknown 1=forward 2=backward 3=both DIR_A Enum Direction phase A 0=unknown 1=forward 2=backward -1=both DIR_B Enum Direction phase B 0=unknown 1=forward 2=backward -1=both DIR_C Enum Direction phase C 0=unknown 1=forward 2=backward...
Page 415: Earth-Fault Protection
2NGA002468 A Protection functions Table 481: SDPHLPDOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy SDPHLPDOC Depending on the frequency of the meas- ured current: f ±2 Hz Current: ±1.5% of set value or ±0.002 × I Voltage: ±1.5% of set value or ±0.002 ×V Phase angle: ±2°...
Page 416 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.2.1.2 EFxPTOC Function block Figure 229: EFxPTOC Function block 4.2.1.3 EFxPTOC Functionality The non-directional earth-fault protection function EFxPTOC is used as non- directional earth-fault protection for feeders. The function starts and operates when the residual current exceeds the set limit. The operate time characteristic for low stage EFLPTOC and high stage EFHPTOC can be selected to be either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT).
Page 417 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Timer Level IRES OPERATE detector ENA_MULT Blocking BLOCK START logic Figure 230: Functional module diagram Level detector Start value . If the measured The measured residual current is compared to the set Start value , the level detector sends an enable-signal to the value exceeds the set Start value setting is multiplied by timer module.
Page 418 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during the drop-off situation. Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times. The setting Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operate The setting parameter...
Page 419 IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are Operating applicable.
Page 420 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 485: Reset time characteristics supported by different stages Reset curve type EFLPTOC EFHPTOC Note (1) Immediate Available for all operate time curves (2) Def time reset Available for all operate time curves (3) Inverse reset Available only for ANSI and user pro- grammable curves Type of reset curve setting does not apply to EFIPTOC or when the...
Page 421 2NGA002468 A Protection functions EFHPTOC Input signals Table 487: EFHPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description IRES SIGNAL Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for cur- rent multiplier EFIPTOC Input signals Table 488: EFIPTOC Input signals Name...
Page 422 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.2.1.10 Settings EFLPTOC Settings Table 492: EFLPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.010...10.000 0.005 0.010 Start value Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 Multiplier for scal- ing the start value Time multiplier 0.025...15.000 0.005 1.000...
Page 423 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 0.01 29.10 Parameter D for customer program- mable curve Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 Parameter E for customer program- mable curve Table 495: EFLPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 424 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.0001 0.1217 Parameter B for customer program- mable curve Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 0.01 2.00 Parameter C for customer program- mable curve Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 0.01 29.10...
Page 425 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description 4=test/blocked 5=off EFHPTOC Monitored data Table 504: EFHPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time EFHPTOC Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test...
Page 426 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Characteristic Value EFIPTOC : 16 ms 18 ms 20 ms = 2 × set Start Fault 13 ms 14 ms 16 ms value Start = 10 × set Fault value EFHPTOC and EFLP- 23 ms 26 ms 29 ms TOC : Start...
Page 427: Non-Directional Earth-Fault Protection Xefxptoc (Ansi 51G/51N-1, 51G51N-2, 50G/N 51G/N)
2NGA002468 A Protection functions Table 508: EFHPTOC Technical revision history Product Technical Change connectivi revision ty level PCL1 Added support for definite operate time mode selection (global Operate delay time to 20 ms. setting). Minimum for Table 509: EFIPTOC Technical revision history Product Technical Change...
Page 428 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A XEFLPTOC and high stage XEFHPTOC can be selected to be either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT). The instantaneous stage XEFIPTOC always oepartes with the DT characteristic. In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets when the fault current disappears.
Page 429 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Start value setting is multiplied by the module. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the Start value Mult setting. Start value Mult higher than necessary. If Do not set the multiplier setting the value is too high, the function may not operate at all during an inrush current followed by a non-directional earth fault current, no matter how severe the fault is.
Page 430 IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable.
Page 431 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Table 513: Timer characteristics supported by different stages Operating curve type supported by 51N/G 50N/G-1 50N-G-2 (1) ANSI Extremely Inverse (2) ANSI Very Inverse (3) ANSI Normal Inverse (4) ANSI Moderately Inverse (5) ANSI Definite Time (6) Long Time Extremely Inverse (7) Long Time Very Inverse (8) Long Time Inverse...
Page 432 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Operating curve type supported by 51N/G 50N/G-1 50N-G-2 (-9) Recloser 8+ (111) (-10) Recloser 8* (-11) Recloser 9 (131) (-12) Recloser 11 (141) (-13) Recloser 13 (142) (-14) Recloser 14 (119) (-15) Recloser 15 (112) (-16) Recloser 16 (139) (-17) Recloser 17 (103) (-18) Recloser 18 (151) (-19) Recloser A (101)
Page 433 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Operating curve type supported by 51N/G 50N/G-1 50N-G-2 (-36) Recloser V (137) (-37) Recloser W (138) (-38) Recloser Y (120) (-39) Recloser Z (134) XEFIPTOC supports only definite time characteristics. For a detailed description of timers, see the General function block features section in this manual.
Page 434 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.2.2.9 Signals XEFLPTOC Input signals Table 515: XEFLPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description IRES SIGNAL Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for cur- rent multiplier XEFHPTOC Input signals Table 516: XEFHPTOC Input signals...
Page 435 2NGA002468 A Protection functions XEFHPTOC Output signals Table 519: XEFHPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start XEFIPTOC Output signals Table 520: XEFIPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.2.2.10 Settings XEFLPTOC Settings Table 521: XEFLPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter...
Page 436 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description -4=Recloser 4 -5=Recloser 5 -6=Recloser 6 -7=Recloser 7 -8=Recloser 8 -9=Recloser 8+ -10=Recloser 8* -11=Recloser 9 -12=Recloser 11 -13=Recloser 13 -14=Recloser 14 -15=Recloser 15 -16=Recloser 16 -17=Recloser 17 -18=Recloser 18 -19=Recloser A -20=Recloser B -21=Recloser C...
Page 437 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Table 523: XEFLPTOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 0.0001 28.2000 Parameter A for customer program- mable curve Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.0001 0.1217...
Page 438 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 2=Def time reset 3=Inverse reset Start block value 1.00...40.00 0.01 5.00 Start block value Start block enable 0=Off Start block enable 0=Off 1=On Op delay time IDMT 0...60000 Op delay time IDMT Table 527: XEFHPTOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range)
Page 439 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 5=off Table 531: XEFIPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time 4.2.2.11 Monitored data XEFLPTOC Monitored data Table 532: XEFLPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 440: Non-Directional Earth-Fault Protection, Instantaneous Only Stage Efipioc (Ansi 50G/50N)
Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.2.2.12 XEFxPTOC Technical data Table 535: XEFxPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accu- Depending on the frequency of the current measured: fn ±2Hz racy XEFLPTOC ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x I XEFHPTOC "±1.5% of set value or ±0.002 x I (at currents in the range of 0.1…10 x I ±5.0% of the set value (at currents in the range of 10…...
Page 441 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.2.3.1 EFIPIOC Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE identification identification identification Non-directional earth-fault protec- EFIPIOC Io>>>> 50G/50N tion, instantaneous only stage 4.2.3.2 EFIPIOC Function block Figure 233: EFIPIOC Function block 4.2.3.3 EFIPIOC Functionality The non-directional earth-fault protection, instantaneous only stage EFIPIOC is used as non-directional earth-fault protection for feeders.
Page 442 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A IRES Level OPERATE detector BLOCK ENA_MULT Figure 234: Functional module diagram Level detector EFIPIOC is fixed to use peak-to-peak with peak backup measurement mode. The Start value . If the measured value measured residual current is compared to the set Start value , the OPERATE output is activated.
Page 443 2NGA002468 A Protection functions EFIPIOC Output signals Table 538: EFIPIOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate 4.2.3.8 EFIPIOC Settings Table 539: EFIPIOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 1.00...40.00 0.01 1.00 Start value Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 Multiplier for scal-...
Page 444: Directional Earth-Fault Protection Defxpdef (Ansi 67G/N-1 51G/N-1, 67G/N-2 51G/N-2)
Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Characteristic Value IFault = 2x set 12ms 15ms 19ms Start value IFault = 10x set 12ms 13ms 16ms Start value Reset time Typically <40ms Reset ratio Typically 0.96 2, 3 Critical impulse time Typically 2ms 4.2.3.11 EFIPIOC Technical revision history Table 543: EFIPIOC Technical revision history Product...
Page 445 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.2.4.2 DEFxPDEF Function block Figure 235: DEFxPDEF Function block 4.2.4.3 DEFxPDEF Functionality The directional earth-fault protection function DEFxPDEF is used as directional earth-fault protection for feeders. The function starts and operates when the operating quantity (current) and polarizing quantity (voltage) exceed the set limits and the angle between them is inside the set operating sector.
Page 446 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. The GRPOFF signal is available in the function block called Protection. There are a few special conditions which must be noted with the configuration. Table 545: Special conditions Condition Description...
Page 447 2NGA002468 A Protection functions If both the limits are exceeded, the level detector sends an enabling signal to the Enable voltage limit setting is set to "False", Voltage start timer module. When the value has no effect and the level detection is purely based on the operating quantity. Start value setting is multiplied by the Start If the ENA_MULT input is active, the value Mult setting.
Page 448 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Operation mode Description Phase angle 80 The sector maximum values are frozen to 80 degrees respectively. Min forward angle and Min reverse angle are settable. Only Phase angle 88 The sector maximum values are frozen to 88 degrees. Otherwise as "Phase angle 80"...
Page 449 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Table 547: Monitored data values Monitored data values Description ANGLE Also called operating angle, shows the angle difference be- tween the polarizing quantity (Uo, U ) and operating quanti- ty (Io, I ANGLE_RCA The angle difference between the operating angle and Char- acteristic angle, that is, ANGLE_RCA = ANGLE –...
Page 450 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available in the monitored data view. Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration >...
Page 451 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 237: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=0 degrees in a compensated network Example 2 The "Phase angle" mode is selected, solidly earthed network (φRCA = +60 deg) Characteristic angle = +60 deg => REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 452 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 238: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=+60 degrees in a solidly earthed network Example 3 The "Phase angle" mode is selected, isolated network (φRCA = -90 deg) Characteristic angle = -90 deg => REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 453 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 239: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=–90 degrees in an isolated network Directional earth-fault protection in an isolated neutral network In isolated networks, there is no intentional connection between the system neutral point and earth. The only connection is through the phase-to-earth capacitances (C ) of phases and leakage resistances (R ).
Page 454 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 240: Earth-fault situation in an isolated network Directional earth-fault protection in a compensated network In compensated networks, the capacitive fault current and the inductive resonance coil current compensate each other. The protection cannot be based on the reactive current measurement, since the current of the compensation coil would disturb the operation of the protection relays.
Page 455 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 241: Earth-fault situation in a compensated network The Petersen coil or the earthing resistor may be temporarily out of operation. To Characteristic keep the protection scheme selective, it is necessary to update the angle setting accordingly. This can be done with an auxiliary input in the protection relay which receives a signal from an auxiliary switch of the disconnector of the Petersen coil in compensated networks.
Page 456 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A groups or the RCA_CTL input. Alternatively, the operating sector of the directional earth-fault protection function can be extended to cover the operating sectors of both neutral earthing principles. Such characteristic is valid for both unearthed and compensated network and does not require any modification in case the neutral earthing changes temporarily from the unearthed to compensated network or vice versa.
Page 457 IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are Operating applicable.
Page 458 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 552: Reset time characteristics supported by different stages Reset curve type DEFLPDEF DEFHPDEF Note (1) Immediate Available for all operate time curves (2) Def time reset Available for all operate time curves (3) Inverse reset Available only for ANSI and user pro- grammable curves 4.2.4.9...
Page 459 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 243: Configurable operating sectors in phase angle characteristic Table 553: Momentary operating direction Fault direction The value for DIRECTION Angle between the polarizing and operating 0 = unknown quantity is not in any of the defined sectors. Angle between the polarizing and operating 1= forward quantity is in the forward sector.
Page 460 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Iosin(φ) and Iocos(φ) criteria A more modern approach to directional protection is the active or reactive current measurement. The operating characteristic of the directional operation depends on the earthing principle of the network. The Iosin(φ) characteristics is used in an isolated network, measuring the reactive component of the fault current caused by the earth capacitance.
Page 461 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 244: Operating characteristic Iosin(φ) in forward fault The operating sector is limited by angle correction, that is, the operating sector is 180 degrees - 2*(angle correction). Example 2. Iosin(φ) criterion selected, reverse-type fault => FAULT_DIR = 2 Figure 245: Operating characteristic Iosin(φ) in reverse fault REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 462 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Example 3. Iocos(φ) criterion selected, forward-type fault => FAULT_DIR = 1 Figure 246: Operating characteristic Iocos(φ) in forward fault Example 4. Iocos(φ) criterion selected, reverse-type fault => FAULT_DIR = 2 Figure 247: Operating characteristic Iocos(φ) in reverse fault REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 463 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Phase angle 80 Operation mode setting The operation criterion phase angle 80 is selected with the by using the value "Phase angle 80". Phase angle 80 implements the same functionality as the phase angle but with the following differences: Max forward angle and Max reverse angle settings cannot be set but they •...
Page 464: Operation Mode Setting
Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Io / % of I Min forward angle 80 deg Operating zone 3% of In 70 deg Non- 1% of In operating zone Figure 249: Phase angle 80 amplitude ( Directional mode = Forward) Phase angle 88 Operation mode setting The operation criterion phase angle 88 is selected with the using the value "Phase angle 88".
Page 465 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 250: Operating characteristic for phase angle 88 Io / % of I 88 deg 100% of In Min forward angle 85 deg 20% of In 73 deg 1% of In Figure 251: Phase angle 88 amplitude ( Directional mode = Forward) REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 466 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.2.4.10 DEFxPDEF Application The directional earth-fault protection DEFxPDEF is designed for protection and clearance of earth faults and for earth-fault protection of different equipment connected to the power systems, such as shunt capacitor banks or shunt reactors, and for backup earth-fault protection of power transformers.
Page 467 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Pol reversal parameter to "True" or by switching the polarity of the residual voltage measurement wires. Although the Iosin(φ) operation can be used in solidly earthed networks, the phase angle is recommended. Connection of measuring transformers in directional earth fault applications The residual current Io can be measured with a core balance current transformer or the residual connection of the phase current signals.
Page 468 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A DEFLPDEF Input signals Table 555: DEFLPDEF Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents IRES SIGNAL Residual current SIGNAL Three-phase voltages URES SIGNAL Residual voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN...
Page 469 2NGA002468 A Protection functions DEFHPDEF Output signals Table 558: DEFHPDEF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start FAULT_DIR Enum Detected fault direction DIRECTION Enum Direction information 4.2.4.12 Settings DEFLPDEF Settings Table 559: DEFLPDEF Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 470 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Max reverse angle 0...180 Maximum phase angle in reverse di- rection Min forward angle 0...180 Minimum phase an- gle in forward di- rection Min reverse angle 0...180 Minimum phase an- gle in reverse direc- tion Voltage start value...
Page 471 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 2=DFT 3=Peak-to-Peak Min operate current 0.5...100.0 Minimum operating current Min operate volt- 1.0...100.0 Minimum operating voltage Correction angle 0.0...10.0 Characteristic cor- rection angle in IoCos and IoSin mode Pol reversal 0=False Rotate polarizing 0=False...
Page 472 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 2=Def time reset 3=Inverse reset Operation mode 1=Phase angle Operation criteria 1=Phase angle 2=IoSin 3=IoCos 4=Phase angle 80 5=Phase angle 88 Enable voltage limit 0=False 1=True Enable voltage limit 1=True Table 565: DEFHPDEF Non group settings (Basic) Parameter...
Page 473 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.2.4.13 Monitored data DEFLPDEF Monitored data Table 567: DEFLPDEF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time ANGLE_RCA FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Angle between operat- ing angle and charac- teristic angle ANGLE FLOAT32...
Page 474 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Characteristic Value ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Voltage ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Phase angle: ±2° DEFHPDEF Current: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I (at currents in the range of 0.1…10 × I ±5.0% of the set value (at currents in the range of 10…40 ×...
Page 475: Directional Earth-Fault Protection Xdeflpdef (Ansi 67G/N-1 51G/N-1)
2NGA002468 A Protection functions Characteristic Value Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression DFT: -50 dB at f = n × f , where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,… Peak-to-Peak: No suppression 4.2.4.15 DEFxPDEF Technical revision history...
Page 476 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.2.5.2 XDEFLPDEF Function block XDEFLPDEF1 OPERATE START IRES URES BLOCK ENA_MULT RCA_CTL Figure 253: XDEFLPDEF Function block 4.2.5.3 XDEFLPDEF Functionality The eath-fault function XDEFLPDEF is used as directional eath-fault protection for feeders. There are three different polarization signals - measured zero sequence voltage, calculated zero sequence voltage and negative sequence voltage.
Page 477 2NGA002468 A Protection functions See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. The GRPOFF signal is available in the function block called Protection. There are a few special conditions which must be noted with the configuration. Table 573: Special conditions Condition Description...
Page 478 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Voltage start value . If both limits are exceeded, the level detector sends an enable- Enable voltage limit setting is set to “False”, signal to the timer module. When the Voltage start value has no effect and the level detection is purely based on the Start value setting is multiplied ground current.
Page 479 2NGA002468 A Protection functions RCA_CTL, in which case the alternatives are -90° and 0°. The operation of RCA_CTL Characteristic angle setting. depends on the Correction angle setting can be used to improve selectivity when there are inaccuracies due to measurement transformers. The setting decreases the operation sector.
Page 480 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operate delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of Operating curve the timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the type , Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings.
Page 481 2NGA002468 A Protection functions with the polarizing quantity to produce the maximum torque. That is, RCA is the angle between the maximum torque line and polarizing quantity. If the polarizing quantity is in phase with the maximum torque line, RCA is 0 degrees. The angle is positive if operating current lags the polarizing quantity and negative if it leads the polarizing quantity.
Page 482 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A (polarizing quantity) Characteristic angle = +60 deg maximum torque line Min forward angle Min operate current (operating quantity) Max reverse angle Max forward angle Min reverse angle zero torque line Figure 256: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=+60 degrees in a solidly grounded network Example 3 The “Phase angle”...
Page 483 2NGA002468 A Protection functions (polarizing quantity) Characteristic angle = -90 deg Max forward angle Min reverse angle maximum torque line (operating quantity) Min forward angle Max reverse angle Min operate current zero torque line Figure 257: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=–90 degrees in an isolated network Directional earth-fault protection in an isolated neutral network In isolated networks, there is no intentional connection between the system neutral...
Page 484 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A ΣI ΣI ΣI Figure 258: Earth-fault situation in an isolated network Directional earth-fault protection in a compensated network In compensated networks, the capacitive fault current and the inductive resonance coil current compensate each other. The protection cannot be based on the reactive current measurement, since the current of the compensation coil would disturb the operation of the relays.
Page 485 2NGA002468 A Protection functions The Petersen coil or the earthing resistor may be temporarily out of operation. To keep the protection scheme selective, it is necessary to update the characteristic angle setting accordingly. This is done with an auxiliary input in the relay which receives a signal from an auxiliary switch of the disconnector of the Petersen coil in compensated networks or of the earthing resistor in earthed networks.
Page 486: Measurement Mode
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable.
Page 487 2NGA002468 A Protection functions values “ANSI Def. Time” or “IEC Def. Time”. The functionality is identical in both cases. The following characteristics, which comply with the list in the IEC 61850-7-4 specification, indicate the characteristics supported by different stages: Table 579: Timer characteristics supported by different stages Operating curve type Supported by 67/51N and 67/50N-1...
Page 488 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Operating curve type Supported by 67/51N and 67/50N-1 67/50N-2 (-5) Recloser 5 (114) (-6) Recloser 6 (136) (-7) Recloser 7 (152) (-8) Recloser 8 (113) (-9) Recloser 8+ (111) (-10) Recloser 8* (-11) Recloser 9 (131) (-12) Recloser 11 (141) (-13) Recloser 13 (142) (-14) Recloser 14 (119)
Page 489 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Operating curve type Supported by 67/51N and 67/50N-1 67/50N-2 (-31) Recloser M (118) (-32) Recloser N (104) (-33) Recloser P (115) (-34) Recloser R (105) (-35) Recloser T (161) (-36) Recloser V (137) (-37) Recloser W (138) (-38) Recloser Y (120) (-39) Recloser Z (134) For a detailed description of the timers, see the General function block...
Page 490 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A The sector limits are always given as positive degree values. Max forward angle setting gives the clockwise In the forward operation area, the Min forward angle setting correspondingly the anti-clockwise sector, sector and the Characteristic angle setting. measured from the Max reverse angle setting gives the clockwise In the reverse operation area, the...
Page 491 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Table 581: Momentary operating direction Fault direction The value for DIRECTION Angle between the polarizing and operating quantity is 0 = unknown not in any of the defined sectors. Angle between the polarizing and operating quantity is 1= forward in the forward sector.
Page 492 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A to the operation area of the component. Therefore, the I cos(φ) characteristic is recommended, since the risk of faulty operation is smaller than with the phase angle criterion. The angle correction setting can be used to improve selectivity. The setting decreases the operation sector.
Page 493 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Correction angle = -90 deg Min operating current Figure 262: Operating characteristic I sin(φ) in forward fault The operating sector is limited by Angle correction, that is, the operating sector is 180 degrees - 2*(Angle correction). Example 2.
Page 494 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Correction angle = -90 deg Min operating current Figure 263: Operating characteristic I sin(φ) in reverse fault Example 3. cos(φ) criterion selected, forward-type fault => FAULT_DIR = 1 REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 495 2NGA002468 A Protection functions = 0 deg Correction angle Min operating current Figure 264: Operating characteristic I cos(φ) in forward fault Example 4. cos(φ) criterion selected, reverse-type fault => FAULT_DIR = 2 REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 496 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A = 0 deg Min operating current Correction angle Figure 265: Operating characteristic I cos(φ) in reverse fault Phase angle, classic 80 Operation mode The operation criterion phase angle classic 80 is selected with the setting using the value “Phase angle 80”. Phase angle classic 80 implements the same functionality as the phase angle, but with the following differences: Max forward angle and Max reverse angle settings are not settable but have...
Page 497: Operation Mode
2NGA002468 A Protection functions Forward area 70 deg 80 deg Min forward angle Non-operating area Max forward angle 80 deg 70 deg Max reverse angle Min reverse angle Backward 3% nominal area amplitude 1% nominal amplitude Figure 266: Operating characteristic for phase angle classic 80 / % of Min forward angle 80 deg...
Page 498 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A • If the current amplitude is between 1...100 percent of the nominal current, the sector limit increases linearly from 85 degrees to 88 degrees • If the current amplitude is more than 100 percent of the nominal current, the sector limit is 88 degrees.
Page 499 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.2.5.10 XDEFLPDEF Application The directional earth-fault protection XDEFLPDEF is designed for protection and clearance of earth faults and for earth-fault protection of different equipment connected to the power systems, such as shunt capacitor banks or shunt reactors, and for backup earth-fault protection of power transformers.
Page 500 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A the Pol reversal parameter to “True” or by switching the polarity of the zero sequence voltage measurement wires. Although the I sin(φ) operation can be used in solidly earthed networks, the phase angle is recommended. In some applications, negative sequence polarization is preferred over zero sequence polarization.
Page 501 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 270: Connection of measuring transformers 4.2.5.11 Signals XDEFLPDEF Input signals Table 584: XDEFLPDEF Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents IRES SIGNAL Residual current SIGNAL Three-phase voltages URES SIGNAL Residual voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the block- ing mode...
Page 502 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A XDEFLPDEF Output signals Table 585: XDEFLPDEF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.2.5.12 XDEFLPDEF Settings Table 586: XDEFLPDEF Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.010...5.000 0.005 0.010 Start value...
Page 503 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description -9=Recloser 8+ -10=Recloser 8* -11=Recloser 9 -12=Recloser 11 -13=Recloser 13 -14=Recloser 14 -15=Recloser 15 -16=Recloser 16 -17=Recloser 17 -18=Recloser 18 -19=Recloser A -20=Recloser B -21=Recloser C -22=Recloser D -23=Recloser E -24=Recloser F -25=Recloser G -26=Recloser H...
Page 504 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 587: XDEFLPDEF Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type 2=Def time reset 3=Inverse reset Operation mode 1=Phase angle 1=Phase angle Operation criteria 2=IoSin 3=IoCos 4=Phase angle 80...
Page 505 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pol reversal 0=False 0=False Rotate polarizing quantity 1=True Pol quantity 3=Zero seq. volt. Reference quantity 3=Zero seq. volt. used to determine 4=Neg. seq. volt. fault direction 4.2.5.13 XDEFLPDEF Monitored data Table 590: XDEFLPDEF Monitored data Name Type...
Page 506: Transient-Intermittent Earth-Fault Protection Intrptef (Ansi 67Ntef/Nief)
Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 591: XDEFLPDEF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accu- XDEFLPDEF Depending on the frequency of the current measured: racy ±2Hz Current: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x I Voltage: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x V Phase angle: ±2°...
Page 507 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.2.6.2 INTRPTEF Function block Figure 271: INTRPTEF Function block 4.2.6.3 INTRPTEF Functionality The transient/intermittent earth-fault protection function INTRPTEF is a function designed for the protection and clearance of permanent and intermittent earth faults in distribution and sub-transmission networks. Fault detection is done from the residual current and residual voltage signals by monitoring the transients.
Page 508 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.2.6.5 INTRPTEF Operation principle Operation setting. The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of INTRPTEF can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 509 2NGA002468 A Protection functions measurement and special filtering techniques. This enables fault direction determination which is not sensitive to disturbances in measured Io and Uo signals, for example, switching transients. Directional mode setting "Forward" is used, the protection operates when When Directional mode setting "Reverse"...
Page 510 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 273: Example of INTRPTEF operation in ”Transient EF” mode in the faulty feeder In the "Intermittent EF" mode the OPERATE output is activated when the following conditions are fulfilled: Peak counter limit • the number of transients that have been detected exceeds the setting Operate delay time •...
Page 511 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 274: Example of INTRPTEF operation in ”Intermittent EF” mode in the faulty feeder, Peak counter limit=3 The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available in the monitored data view.
Page 512 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated. 4.2.6.6 INTRPTEF Application INTRPTEF is an earth-fault function dedicated to operate in intermittent and permanent earth faults occurring in distribution and sub-transmission networks. Fault detection is done from the residual current and residual voltage signals by monitoring the transients with predefined criteria.
Page 513 2NGA002468 A Protection functions the voltage of the faulty phase decreases and the corresponding capacitance is discharged to earth (→ discharge transients). At the same time, the voltages of the healthy phases increase and the related capacitances are charged (→ charge transient).
Page 514 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.2.6.8 INTRPTEF Settings Table 596: INTRPTEF Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Directional mode 2=Forward Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward 3=Reverse Operate delay time 40...1200000 Operate delay time Voltage start value 0.05...0.50 0.01 0.20 Voltage start value Table 597: INTRPTEF Non group settings (Basic)
Page 515: Admittance-Based Earth-Fault Protection Efpadm (Ansi 21Ny)
2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.2.6.10 INTRPTEF Technical data Table 600: INTRPTEF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy (Uo criteria with transi- Depending on the frequency of the measured ent protection) current: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics...
Page 516 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A as well as with underground cables. It can be used as an alternative solution to traditional residual current-based earth-fault protection functions, such as the IoCos mode in DEFxPDEF. Main advantages of EFPADM include a versatile applicability, good sensitivity and easy setting principles. EFPADM is based on evaluating the neutral admittance of the network, that is, the quotient: −...
Page 517 2NGA002468 A Protection functions For troubleshooting, check the contents of this chapter and also the preprocessing blocks in this document. The configuration can be written to the protection relay once the mismatch is corrected. 4.2.7.5 EFPADM Operation principle Operation setting. The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are "On"...
Page 518 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A fault − fault (Equation 32) Admittance Clc mode = "Delta" − ∆ fault prefault − − − ∆ fault prefault (Equation 33) Calculated neutral admittance [Siemens] Residual current during the fault [Amperes] fault Residual voltage during the fault [Volts] fault Prefault residual current [Amperes] prefault...
Page 519 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Sum of the phase-to-earth admittances ( Y ) of the protected Fdtot feeder Magnitude of the earth-fault current of the protected feeder when the fault resistance is zero ohm Magnitude of the nominal phase-to-earth voltage of the system Equation 34 shows that in case of outside faults, the measured admittance equals the admittance of the protected feeder with a negative sign.
Page 520 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A A B C Protected feeder Background network Reverse Fault eTot Im(Yo) Re(Yo) Reverse fault: Yo ≈ -j*I Figure 279: Admittance calculation during a reverse fault Resistance of the parallel resistor Inductance of the compensation coil Resistance of the neutral earthing resistor Phase-to-earth admittance of the protected feeder Phase-to-earth admittance of the background network For example, in a 15 kV compensated network with the magnitude of the earth-fault...
Page 521 2NGA002468 A Protection functions In this case, the resistive part of the measured admittance is due to leakage losses of the protected feeder. As they are typically very small, the resistive part is close to zero. Due to inaccuracies in the voltage and current measurement, the small real part of the apparent neutral admittance may appear positive.
Page 522 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Equation 37 shows that in case of a fault inside the protected feeder in unearthed networks, the measured admittance equals the admittance of the background network. The admittance is dominantly reactive; the small resistive part of the measured admittance is due to the leakage losses of the background network.
Page 523 2NGA002468 A Protection functions A B C Protected feeder Forward Fault eTot Background network eTot Forward fault, high resistance earthed network: Yo ≈ (I +j*(I ))/U eTot Im(Yo) Forward fault, unearthed network: Yo ≈ j*(I eTot Under-comp. (K<1) Re(Yo) Resonance (K=1) Reverse fault: Yo ≈...
Page 524: Operation Characteristic
Protection functions 2NGA002468 A must therefore be based on the real part of the measured admittance, that is, conductance. Thus, the best selectivity is achieved when the compensated network is operated either in the undercompensated or overcompensated mode. For example, in a 15 kV compensated network, the magnitude of the earth-fault current of the protected feeder is 10 A (Rf = 0 Ω) and the magnitude of the network is 100 A (Rf = 0 Ω).
Page 525 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Table 604: Operation criteria Operation mode Description Admittance criterion Susceptance criterion Conductance criterion Yo, Go Admittance criterion combined with the conductance criteri- Yo, Bo Admittance criterion combined with the susceptance criteri- Go, Bo Conductance criterion combined with the susceptance crite- rion Yo, Go, Bo Admittance criterion combined with the conductance and...
Page 526 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 281: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when Directional mode = "Non-directional" REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 527 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 282: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when Directional mode = "Forward" REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 528 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 283: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when Directional mode = "Reverse" REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 529 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Timer Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set with the Operate delay time setting, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the module operates, the reset timer is activated.
Page 530 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 284: Overadmittance characteristic. Left figure: classical origin-centered admittance circle. Right figure: admittance circle is set off from the origin. Non-directional overconductance characteristic Operation mode The non-directional overconductance criterion is enabled with the Directional mode to "Non-directional". The characteristic is setting set to "Go"...
Page 531 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Forward directional overconductance characteristic Operation The forward directional overconductance criterion is enabled with the mode setting set to "Go" and Directional mode set to "Forward". The characteristic Conductance forward is defined by one overconductance boundary line with the setting.
Page 532 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 287: Forward directional oversusceptance characteristic. Left figure: classical forward directional oversusceptance criterion. Middle figure: characteristic is tilted with negative tilt angle. Right figure: characteristic is tilted with positive tilt angle. Combined overadmittance and overconductance characteristic The combined overadmittance and overconductance criterion is enabled with the Operation mode setting set to "Yo, Go"...
Page 533 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 288: Combined overadmittance and overconductance characteristic. Left figure: classical origin-centered admittance circle combined with two overconductance boundary lines. Right figure: admittance circle is set off from the origin. Combined overconductance and oversusceptance characteristic The combined overconductance and oversusceptance criterion is enabled with the Operation mode setting set to "Go, Bo".
Page 534 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 289: Combined forward directional overconductance and forward directional oversusceptance characteristic. Left figure: the Conductance tilt Ang and Susceptance tilt Ang settings equal zero degrees. Right figure: the setting Conductance tilt Ang > 0 degrees and the setting Susceptance tilt Ang < 0 degrees. Figure 290: Combined non-directional overconductance and non-directional oversusceptance characteristic The non-directional overconductance and non-directional...
Page 535 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.2.7.7 EFPADM Application Admittance-based earth-fault protection provides a selective earth-fault protection for high-resistance earthed, unearthed and compensated networks. It can be applied for the protection of overhead lines as well as with underground cables. It can be used as an alternative solution to traditional residual current-based earth-fault protection functions, for example the IoCos mode in DEFxPDEF.
Page 536 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Unearthed Resonance, K = 1 Over/Under-Compensated, K = 1.2/0.8 Rf = 500 ohm Rf = 2500 ohm Rf = 5000 ohm Rf = 10000 ohm 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm...
Page 537 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Voltage start value = 0.15 × Un Figure 292 According to , this selection ensures at least a sensitivity corresponding to a 2000 ohm fault resistance when the compensation degree varies between 80% and 120%. The greatest sensitivity is achieved when the compensation degree is close to full resonance.
Page 538 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A from origin to include some margin for the admittance operation point due to CT/VT-errors, when fault is located outside the feeder. Conductance forward : 15 A/(15 kV/sqrt(3)) * 0.2 = +0.35 mS corresponding to 3.0 A (at 15 kV). The selected value provides margin considering also the effect of CT/VT-errors in case of outside faults.
Page 539 2NGA002468 A Protection functions EFPADM Input signals Table 605: EFPADM Input signals Name Type Default Description IRES SIGNAL Residual current URES SIGNAL Residual voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode RELEASE BOOLEAN 0=False External trigger to re- lease neutral admit- tance protection EFPADM Output signals...
Page 540 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Conductance for- -500.00...500.00 0.01 1.00 Conductance ward threshold in for- ward direction Conductance re- -500.00...500.00 0.01 -1.00 Conductance verse threshold in reverse direction Susceptance for- -500.00...500.00 0.01 1.00 Susceptance ward threshold in for- ward direction...
Page 541: Harmonics-Based Earth-Fault Protection Haefptoc (Ansi 51Nh)
2NGA002468 A Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description 5=off 4.2.7.11 EFPADM Technical data Table 612: EFPADM Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy At the frequency f = f ±1.0% or ±0.01 mS (In range of 0.5...100 mS) Start time Minimum Typical Maximum...
Page 542 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.2.8.2 HAEFPTOC Function block Figure 295: HAEFPTOC Function block 4.2.8.3 HAEFPTOC Functionality The harmonics-based earth-fault protection function HAEFPTOC is used instead of a traditional earth-fault protection in networks where a fundamental frequency component of the earth-fault current is low due to compensation. By default, HAEFPTOC is used as a standalone mode.
Page 543 2NGA002468 A Protection functions The operation of HAEFPTOC can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. Timer Harmonics Level IRES START calculation detector Current OPERATE comparison I_REF_RES Blocking BLOCK logic Figure 296: Functional module diagram Harmonics calculation...
Page 544 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Frequency Figure 297: High-pass filter Level detector Start value setting. If the value exceeds The harmonics current is compared to the Start value setting, Level detector sends an enabling signal to the the value of the Timer module.
Page 545 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Table 615: Values of the Enable reference use setting Enable reference use Functionality Standalone In the standalone mode, depending on the value Operating curve type setting, the time char- of the acteristics are according to DT or IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of the Oper- ate delay time setting in the DT mode or the value...
Page 546 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired The setting parameter operation time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve but always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting.
Page 547 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.2.8.7 Signals HAEFPTOC Input signals Table 616: HAEFPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description IRES SIGNAL Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode I_REF_RES FLOAT32 Reference current HAEFPTOC Output signals Table 617: HAEFPTOC Output signals Name Type...
Page 548 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 619: HAEFPTOC Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate 100...200000 Minimum operate time time for IDMT curves Type of reset curve 1=Immediate Selection of reset 1=Immediate curve type 2=Def time reset 3=Inverse reset Enable reference 0=False...
Page 549: Wattmetric-Based Earth-Fault Protection Wpwde (Ansi 32N)
2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.2.8.10 HAEFPTOC Technical data Table 623: HAEFPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz ±5% of the set value or ±0.004 × I 1, 2 Start time Typically 77 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms...
Page 550 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.2.9.2 WPWDE Function block Figure 299: WPWDE Function block 4.2.9.3 WPWDE Functionality The wattmetric-based earth-fault protection function WPWDE can be used to detect earth faults in unearthed networks, compensated networks (Petersen coil-earthed networks) or networks with a high-impedance earthing. It can be used as an alternative solution to the traditional residual current-based earth-fault protection functions, for example, the IoCos mode in the directional earth-fault protection function DEFxPDEF.
Page 551 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Table 626: Special conditions Condition Description URES calculated The function requires that all three voltage channels are connected for calculating the re- VT connection must sidual voltage. Setting be "Wye" in that particular UTVTR. Improper analog channel configuration causes a validation error if the analog channels are not completely configured or they do not match with certain settings.
Page 552 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A enabling signal to Level detector. The directional operation is selected with the Directional mode setting. Either the “Forward” or “Reverse” operation mode can be selected. The direction of fault is calculated based on the phase angle difference between the operating quantity Io and polarizing quantity Uo, and the value (ANGLE) is available in the monitored data view.
Page 553 2NGA002468 A Protection functions In addition, the characteristic angle can be changed via the control signal RCA_CTL. The RCA_CTL input is used in the compensated networks where the compensation coil sometimes is temporarily disconnected. When the coil is disconnected, the Characteristic angle setting must compensated network becomes isolated and the be changed.
Page 554 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Correction angle setting should be done carefully as the phase operation sector. The angle error of the measurement transformer varies with the connected burden as well as with the magnitude of the actual primary current that is being measured. An Correction angle alters the operating region is as shown: example of how Maximum torque line...
Page 555 2NGA002468 A Protection functions value (×Pn) depends on whether Io and Uo are measured or calculated from the phase quantities. Timer Once activated, Timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or Operate delay wattmetric IDMT.
Page 556 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 304: Operation time curves for wattmetric IDMT for S ref set at 0.15 xPn REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 557 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.2.9.7 WPWDE Measurement modes The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT" and Measurement mode "Peak-to-Peak". The measurement mode is selected with the setting. 4.2.9.8 WPWDE Application The wattmetric method is one of the commonly used directional methods for detecting the earth faults especially in compensated networks.
Page 558 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A ΣI ΣI ΣI ΣI Figure 306: Typical radial compensated network employed with wattmetric protection The wattmetric function is activated when the residual active power component exceeds the set limit. However, to ensure a selective operation, it is also required that the residual current and residual voltage also exceed the set limit.
Page 559 2NGA002468 A Protection functions The use of wattmetric protection gives a possibility to use the dedicated inverse definite minimum time characteristics. This is applicable in large high-impedance earthed networks with a large capacitive earth-fault current. In a network employing a low-impedance earthed system, a medium-size neutral point resistor is used.
Page 560 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Characteristic an- -179...180 Characteristic an- Time multiplier 0.025...2.000 0.005 1.000 Time multiplier for Wattmetric IDMT curves Operating curve 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time 5=ANSI Def. Time type delay curve type 15=IEC Def.
Page 561: Multifrequency Admittance-Based Earth-Fault Protection Mfadpsde (Ansi 67Nyh)
2NGA002468 A Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description ANGLE_RCA FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Angle between operat- ing angle and charac- teristic angle RES_POWER FLOAT32 -160.000...160.000 Calculated residual ac- tive power WPWDE Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.2.9.12 WPWDE Technical data Table 633: WPWDE Technical data Characteristic Value...
Page 562 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.2.10.1 MFADPSDE Identification Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Multifrequency admittance-based MFADPSDE Io> ->Y 67NYH earth-fault protection 4.2.10.2 MFADPSDE Function block Figure 307: MFADPSDE Function block 4.2.10.3 MFADPSDE Functionality The multifrequency admittance-based earth-fault protection function MFADPSDE provides selective directional earth-fault protection for high-impedance earthed networks, that is, for compensated, unearthed and high-resistance earthed systems.
Page 563 2NGA002468 A Protection functions The neutral point in compensated networks is earthed via a controllable centralized arc suppression coil located typically in the primary substation. Additionally, (fixed) distributed compensation coils can be used, which are installed in relevant locations along the protected feeders. In unearthed networks, the neutral point in the primary substation is not connected to earth.
Page 564 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 637: Special conditions Condition Description URES calculated The function requires that all three voltage channels are connected for calculating the re- VT connection must sidual voltage. Setting be "Wye" in that particular UTVTR. Improper analog channel configuration causes a validation error if the analog channels are not completely configured or they do not match with certain settings.
Page 565 2NGA002468 A Protection functions MFADPSDE supports zero-sequence voltage monitoring based on measurement (from open-delta winding) or calculated (derived from phase-to-earth voltages). Voltage start value , an earth fault When the magnitude of exceeds setting is detected. The GFC module reports the exceeded value to the Fault direction determination module and Operation logic.
Page 566 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A value should be selected based on the network's resonance curve (see Figure 309 Such coordination of different protection stages enables: • Indication (but no tripping) of transient, self-extinguishing earth faults, where the zero-sequence voltage may temporarily rise to a high value and then decay slowly away.
Page 567 2NGA002468 A Protection functions (Equation 54) where n = 2, 3, 5, 7 and 9 nth harmonic frequency neutral admittance phasor nth harmonic frequency zero-sequence current phasor nth harmonic frequency zero-sequence voltage phasor Im Y nth harmonic frequency susceptance, For fault direction determination, the fundamental frequency admittance and harmonic susceptances are summed together in phasor format.
Page 568 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A (Equation 56) (Equation 57) (Equation 58) (Equation 59) (Equation 60) Figure 310: Principle of Cumulative Phasor Summing (CPS) The CPS technique provides a stable directional phasor quantity despite individual phasors varying in magnitude and phase angle in time due to an unstable fault type such as a restriking or intermittent earth fault.
Page 569 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Directional mode as "Forward" The direction of MFADPSDE is defined with setting or "Reverse". The operation characteristic is defined by a tilted operation sector as Figure 311 illustrated in . The characteristic provides universal applicability, that is, it is valid in both compensated and unearthed networks even if the compensation coil is temporarily switched off.
Page 570 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A +90 deg. +45 deg.  0 deg.    Tilt angle -90 deg. Figure 311: Directional characteristic of MFADPSDE The residual current should be measured with accurate Core Balance Current Transformer (CBCT) to minimize the measurement errors, especially phase displacement.
Page 571 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Equation 61 = 50 A, I = +10 A and I = 5 A. From , j = 85 deg. Thus EFFd detuning damping Tilt angle should not exceed ~3 deg. However, such a low Tilt angle setting may endanger the security of protection due to measurement errors of the CBCTs.
Page 572 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Stabilized fundamental frequency admittance estimate, which is result from fundamental frequency admittance calculation utilizing the Cumulative Phasor Summing (CPS) technique. Fundamental frequency zero-sequence current phasor calculated utilizing the Cumulative Phasor Summing (CPS) technique. Fundamental frequency zero-sequence voltage phasor calculated utilizing the Cumulative Phasor Summing (CPS) technique.
Page 573 2NGA002468 A Protection functions +90 deg. +45 deg.  0 deg.    Tilt angle -90 deg. Figure 312: Automatic adaptation of current magnitude supervision condition (setting Min operate current) to either resistive part or amplitude of I1 ostab based on the phase angle of accumulated sum admittance phasor, when setting Operating quantity = “Adaptive”.
Page 574 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A . This also means that in compensated networks during earth faults with rich harmonic content in residual quantities, operation can be achieved without the parallel resistor of the centralized compensation coil. Operating quantity is set to "Resistive", the set minimum operate current When threshold (setting Min operate current) is compared to the resistive component of Figure 313...
Page 575 2NGA002468 A Protection functions +90 deg. +45 deg.  0 deg.    Tilt angle -90 deg. Figure 314: Operating quantity = "Amplitude" and Directional mode = "Forward" If the “Adaptive” or “Resistive” operating quantity is selected, the setting operate current should be set to value: <...
Page 576 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 315: Example of interpretation of network damping value, I_DAMPING, calculated by the coil controller For example, if the resistive current of the parallel resistor is 10 A (at primary voltage Min operate current . level), then a value of 0.5 · 10 A = 5 A could be used for setting The network damping value, I_DAMPING, calculated by the coil controller Min operate current .
Page 577 2NGA002468 A Protection functions The residual current should be measured with an accurate CBCT to minimize the measurement errors, especially phase displacement. The parallel resistor should be kept connected during the healthy state so that in case of a fault, earth-fault protection can immediately see sufficient value of resistive component for operation.
Page 578 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A PEAK_IND release Reset timer INTR_EF Reset delay time Reset delay time Figure 316: Example of operation of Transient detector: indication of detected transient by PEAK_IND output and detection of restriking or intermittent earth fault by INTR_EF output (setting Peak counter limit = 3) Operation logic MFADPSDE supports four operation modes selected with setting Operation mode: "General EF", "Alarming EF", "Intermittent EF"...
Page 579 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Start delay time has elapsed. OPERATE output The START output is activated once Operate delay time has elapsed and the above three conditions is activated once are valid. Reset timer is started if any of the above three conditions is not valid.
Page 580 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 317: Operation in “General EF” mode Alarming EF Operation mode “Alarming EF” is applicable in all kinds of earth faults in high-impedance earthed networks, that is, in compensated, unearthed and high resistance earthed networks, where fault detection is only alarming. It is intended to detect earth faults regardless of their type (transient, intermittent or restriking, permanent, high or low ohmic).
Page 581 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Start delay time has elapsed. OPERATE output is The START output is activated once not valid in the “Alarming EF” mode. Reset timer is started if any of the above three conditions are not valid. In case the fault is transient and self-extinguishes, START Reset delay time ).
Page 582 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Operation mode “Intermittent EF” is used to detect restriking or intermittent earth Peak faults. A required number of intermittent earth fault transients set with the counter limit setting must be detected for operation. Therefore, transient faults or permanent faults with only initial fault ignition transient are not detected in this mode.
Page 583 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 319: Operation in “Intermittent EF” mode, Peak counter limit = 3 Transient EF Operation mode “Transient EF” is dedicated for detecting fast transient faults where the fault current stays on only for a very short time. It is recommended method in networks, where network damping has very small value or when parallel resistor of the coil is not used, for example in sub-transmission networks.
Page 584 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A • Estimated stabilized fundamental frequency residual current exceeds the set Min operate current level, which is applied in current magnitude threshold supervision, and which is further defined with setting Operating quantity (available options are "Adaptive", "Amplitude" and "Resistive"). In the “Transient EF”...
Page 585 2NGA002468 A Protection functions controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay's program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode . Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the operate timer is frozen to the prevailing value.
Page 586 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A TONGAPC: On delay time (ms) ROVPTOV, START -output TONGAPC, Q1 -output MFADPSDE, BLOCK -input, inversed MFADPSDE, START -output MFADPSDE, OPERATE -output Figure 321: Logic to release MFADPSDE at the time of resistor (re)connection The logic enables exact operate time of MFADPSDE elapsed from time of resistor (re)connection.
Page 587 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 322: Activation of BLK_EF output (indication that fault is located opposite to the set operate direction) 4.2.10.6 MFADPSDE Application MFADPSDE provides selective directional earth-fault protection for high-impedance earthed networks, that is, for compensated, unearthed and high-resistance earthed systems.
Page 588 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 639: Comparison of the MFADPSDE functionality with traditional methods in resonant earthed networks Earth-fault type Transient Continuous Restriking / Low- High-ohmic Intermittent ohmic Traditional Iocos Traditional Wischer New MFADPSDE As shown by numerous practical field tests, MFADPSDE provides better sensitivity and selectivity compared with traditional methods with less complexity in settings and configuration.
Page 589 2NGA002468 A Protection functions separate fault type dedicated earth-fault functions which need to be coordinated. Other advantages of MFADPSDE include versatile applicability, good selectivity, good sensitivity and easy setting principles. Three instances (stages) of MFADPSDE are available. 4.2.10.7 Signals MFADPSDE Input signals Table 640: MFADPSDE Input signals Name Type...
Page 590 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 3=Reverse Voltage start value 0.01...1.00 0.01 0.10 Voltage start value Operate delay time 60...1200000 Operate delay time Table 643: MFADPSDE Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operating quantity 1=Adaptive 1=Adaptive...
Page 591: Directional Fault Pass Indicator Fpiptoc (Ansi 67Nfpi)
2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.2.10.10 MFADPSDE Technical data Table 647: MFADPSDE Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured voltage: ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Start time Typically 35 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Operate time accuracy...
Page 592 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.2.11.3 FPIPTOC Functionality The fault passage indicator function FPIPTOC provides selective Fault Passage Indicator (FPI) functionality for single-phase earth faults in high-impedance earthed networks, that is, in compensated, unearthed and high resistance earthed systems. It can be applied as single-phase earth fault FPI in case of overhead lines and underground cables, regardless of actual earth-fault type (continuous, transient or intermittent) or fault resistance value (low or high(er) ohmic).
Page 593 2NGA002468 A Protection functions = 3·abs(I ) = 3·abs(I (Equation 65) where = Zero-sequence current phasor In order to estimate single-phase earth-fault current, threefold negative-sequence component due to earth fault is used (phase A as reference, a=cos(120 j·sin(120 ), phase rotation: A-B-C). Estimated fundamental frequency earth-fault current amplitude can be derived from phase currents as: = 3·I ·...
Page 594 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A AND I > Start value high (Equation 70) Start value high should be set to high value, which indicates Setting single-phase earth fault with abnormal high earth-fault current value. Such a condition could be due to, for example, malfunction of the Arc suppression Coil itself or the coil tuner.
Page 595 2NGA002468 A Protection functions FPIPTOC Faulted phase selection module The faulted phase selection module provides information about the faulted phase (A, B or C) during a single-phase earth fault. The faulted phase is identified by evaluation of the following equations: FAULTED PHASE A = (Equation 74) FAULTED PHASE B =...
Page 596 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A (Equation 78) (Equation 79) where ΔI ) - I ) = change of phase A current phasor due to earth fault PRE_FLT ΔI ) – I ) = change of phase B current phasor due to earth fault PRE_FLT ΔI ) –...
Page 597 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Angle offset sector is 45…65 deg. Typical setting for Second condition for detection of fault passage is based on evaluation simultaneously ratio of change due to earth fault in earth-fault current to residual current (fundamental frequency): (Equation 80) Equation 80 The indication of fault passage is declared when the current ratio of...
Page 598 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A FPIPTOC Output signals Table 651: FPIPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start EF_IND BOOLEAN Non-directional earth fault detection 4.2.11.7 FPIPTOC Settings Table 652: FPIPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description...
Page 599: Touch Voltage Based Earth-Fault Current Protection Ifptoc (Ansi 46Snq/59N)
2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.2.11.8 FPIPTOC Monitored data Table 656: FPIPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time I_AMPL_RES FLOAT32 0.000...100.000 Residual current ampli- tude I_AMPL_EF FLOAT32 0.000...100.000 Estimated earth-fault current FPIPTOC...
Page 600 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.2.12.2 IFPTOC Function block Figure 326: IFPTOC Function block 4.2.12.3 IFPTOC Functionality The touch voltage-based earth-fault current protection function IFPTOC provides selective earth-fault protection for single-phase earth faults in high-impedance earthed networks, that is, in compensated, unearthed and high resistance earthed systems.
Page 601 2NGA002468 A Protection functions temporary detuning conditions are possible due to increase of use of underground cables, which increase feeder total phase-to-earth capacitance enormously. However, operation of IFPTOC is not based on traditional residual quantities (U but on accurate estimation of earth-fault (EF) current flowing at the fault location. Estimation of earth-fault current is done in real-time utilizing changes in phase currents measured at the beginning of the feeder due to a single-phase earth fault.
Page 602 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 658: Analog inputs Input Description Three phase currents IRES Residual current (measured or calculated) Three phase voltages URES Measured or calculated residual voltage See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. There are a few special conditions which must be noted with the configuration.
Page 603 2NGA002468 A Protection functions EF_IND VALID_EF General URES OPERATE fault Trip logic Fault START criterion current estimation U_AB Earth-fault validity U_BC Touch current & OP_EF check U_CA voltage touch ST_EF voltage IRES estimation protection Cross- OP_XC Fault country ST_XC resistance fault EXT_RELEASE estimation...
Page 604 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A IFPTOC supports fundamental frequency residual voltage monitoring based on measured U from open-delta winding or internally calculated U derived from connected phase-to-earth voltages. Input EXT_RELEASE is alternative method for internal GFC and validity check modules to indicate the presence of earth fault in the protected feeder and to release the calculation of IFPTOC function.
Page 605 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Voltage start value To avoid unselective start or operation of IFPTOC, must always be set to a value which exceeds the maximum healthy-state residual voltage value, taking into consideration of possible network topology changes (variation in unbalance), compensation coil and parallel resistor switching status (variation in damping) and compensation degree variations (variation in detuning).
Page 606 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 329: Illustration of operation of General Fault Criterion (GFC) module and the meaning of setting Revert time In case of secondary testing of IFPTOC function, the pre-fault time in the 2xRevert time . For example, if Revert time = test file must be longer than 300 ms, then pre-fault time in the test file must be longer than 600 ms.
Page 607 2NGA002468 A Protection functions (Equation 86) Equation 86 Interpretation of is that fault current has resistive part due to network damping and imaginary part due to network detuning. Fault current magnitude increases when damping or detuning increases. The effect of fault resistance to fault current magnitude can be written as: (Equation 87) where (Equation 88)
Page 608 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A To estimate the earth-fault current magnitude, change in threefold negative- sequence component due to earth fault is calculated (phase A as reference, phase rotation: ABC): (Equation 90) (Equation 91) (Equation 92) Where = Earth-fault current estimate (phasor) = Earth-fault current estimate (magnitude) = change of phase A current phasor due to earth fault = change of phase B current phasor due to earth fault...
Page 609 2NGA002468 A Protection functions estimate. Measurement of harmonic components can be enabled with setting Enable harmonics = “Enable”, “Disable”. Fundamental frequency component is always included into fault current Enable harmonics = “Disable”. magnitude estimation, even when setting Enable harmonics = “Enable”, the included harmonics are When setting (if their magnitudes are sufficient for an accurate measurement): 2 and 9...
Page 610 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A (Equation 94) Where is the magnitude of the n harmonic negative-sequence current component (n = 1, 2, 3, 5, 7 and 9). In case of frequency adaptive system measurements, only 2 and 5 harmonics are calculated. In case there is fault resistance included in the fault current path, the effect of fault Equation 87 resistance is to decrease the value of earth-fault current as shown by...
Page 611 2NGA002468 A Protection functions resistance compensation, the operation speed of IFPTOC can be accelerated during high(er) ohmic earth faults. Figure 331: Illustration of fault resistance compensation functionality in IFPTOC. Left-hand column: galvanic earth fault (R = 0 ohm). Middle column: a higher ohmic earth fault (R = 3000 ohm) with setting Ena R Compensation = “Disable”.
Page 612 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 332: Simplified illustration and explanation of setting Reduction factor. Only fault current which flows through earth (I ) will introduce rise of earth potential (earth potential rise, EPR, also called as ground potential rise, GPR). Magnitude of the estimated effective earth-fault current is given in Recorded data: Fault current (fundamental frequency magnitude) •...
Page 613 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Transient Ris Comp and Transient React Comp in Recorded data and TR_RIS_COMP and TR_REACT_COMP in Monitored Data. Validity of earth-fault current estimate is indicated by VALID_EF = TRUE. EF validity Op mode = ‘Resistive’, then validity of earth-fault current estimate In case is confirmed by evaluating the polarity of the resistive part of measured admittance (real(Y...
Page 614 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A (Equation 97) where = Conductance representing the total system shunt losses, i.e. losses of the oTot coil(s), the parallel resistor and the total network shunt losses. | = The sum of absolute values of capacitive and inductive susceptances oFdTot of the protected feeder.
Page 615 2NGA002468 A Protection functions (fundamental frequency magnitude). Positive value means that fault is seen inside the protected feeder, negative value means that fault is seen outside the protected feeder. IFPTOC Touch voltage estimation After estimate for earth-fault current is calculated and its validity confirmed, then conversion of fault current estimate into earth potential rise estimate derived using equations below:...
Page 616 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A IFPTOC Earth-fault current and touch voltage protection Based on the practical experience from real earth faults, some faults have re- striking/intermittent characteristics, where the voltage and current waveforms generated by earth fault are rich with harmonics and non-sinusoidal content. In such fault type the operation of IFPTOC can alternatively be based on the counted number of transients instead of estimated fault current or touch voltage.
Page 617 2NGA002468 A Protection functions can be obtained. Sensitivity in terms of fault resistance depends also on the network parameters (nominal voltage, damping and detuning) as described by equation below: (Equation 101) where is the nominal phase-to-earth voltage [V], is the total system damping EF current Str Val in primary amperes.
Page 618 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 333: Example of definite time operation of IFPTOC, when Operation principle = “EF current based”, Operating curve type = “Definite time”. Settings EF current Str Val = 0.04*In (4A) and DT stage Op time = 400ms. Reduction factor = 1.0. Maximum earthing Ris = 10ohm.
Page 619 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 334: Permissible time-touch voltage characteristics given in standard EN 50522 • Time margin for practical circuit-breaker operate time can be applied with CB delay Comp . Default time margin is 0 ms. setting • START and ST_EF outputs are activated when estimated effective earth-fault Reduction factor and current magnitude (considering the effect of settings Enable harmonics ) exceeds setting EF current Str Val and earth fault is detected,...
Page 620 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Maximum earthing Ris is used to scale the touch voltage and earth Setting potential rise requirements defined in standard EN 50522 into corresponding earth-fault current requirements. UTp multiplier enables operation based on permissible earth potential Setting rise U , by scaling of the permissible time-touch voltage characteristics given in standard EN 50522 with Setting...
Page 621 2NGA002468 A Protection functions EF current Str Val is 0.5%*400 A = 2 A. The lower setting EF for setting current Str Val is used, the higher sensitivity in terms of fault resistance can be obtained. Sensitivity in terms of fault resistance depends also on the network parameters (nominal voltage, damping and detuning) as Equation 101 described by...
Page 622 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 335: Operation timer characteristic of IFPTOC function when Operation principle = “EF-current based” and Operating curve type = “Inverse time EN50522”. Setting UTp multiplier is 1.0, Maximum earthing Ris = 10ohms, EF current Str Val = 0.02*In (2A), IDMT stage Min Op Tm = 100 ms and IDMT stage Max Op Tm = 5000 ms.
Page 623 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 336: Operation timer characteristic of IFPTOC function when Operation principle = “EF-current based” and Operating curve type = “Inverse time EN50522”. Setting UTp multiplier is 2.0, Maximum earthing Ris = 10 ohms, EF current Str Val = 0.02*In (4 A), IDMT stage Min Op Tm = 100 ms and IDMT stage Max Op Tm = 5000 ms.
Page 624 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 337: Operation timer characteristic of IFPTOC function when Operation principle = “EF-current based” and Operating curve type = “Inverse time EN50522”. Setting UTp multiplier is 4.0, Maximum earthing Ris = 10 ohms, EF current Str Val = 0.06*In (6 A), IDMT stage Min Op Tm = 100 ms and IDMT stage Max Op Tm = 5000 ms.
Page 625 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 338: Permissible time-touch voltage characteristics given in standard IEEE80 (metal-to-metal contact) • This operation mode can be also used when maximum allowed earth potential t [ sec ]. rise vs. operation speed follows a relationship such as 750 V/√ •...
Page 626 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A For body weight of 70kg: (Equation 104) where is the surface layer derating factor ρ is the surface material resistivity in Ω·m ρ is the resistivity of the earth beneath the surface material in Ω·m ρ ρ...
Page 627 2NGA002468 A Protection functions earthing Ris in primary ohms i.e. the maximum earthing resistance encountered in protected feeder. Fault duration t [sec.] Permissible touch voltage, U converted into corresponding permissible fault current, I 0.05 702 V/R Emax 0.10 496 V/R Emax 0.20 351 V/R...
Page 628 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Maximum earthing Ris in primary ohms i.e. the maximum earthing 89 with setting resistance encountered in protected feeder. Group Highest allowed EPR values [V] converted into corresponding permissible fault current, I [A],when earth fault is automatically disconnected within time t [sec] (750 V/ Maximum earthing Ris )/√t...
Page 629 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 339: Operation timer characteristic of IFPTOC-function when Operation principle = “EF-current based” and Operating curve type = “Inverse time IEEE80”. Setting IEEE multiplier is 500,Maximum earthing Ris is 10 ohms, EF current Str Val = 0.02*In (2 A), IDMT stage Min Op Tm = 100 ms and IDMT stage Max Op Tm = 5000 ms.
Page 630 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Operation time can be either definite time or inverse time, selected with setting Operating curve type = “Definite time”, “Inverse time EN50522” or “Inverse time IEEE80”. Operating curve type = “Definite time” is selected, then When •...
Page 631 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 340: Example of definite time operation of IFPTOC, when Operation principle = “Touch voltage based”, Operating curve type = “Definite time”. Setting Touch Vol Str Val = 40 V and DT stage Op time = 400 ms. Maximum earthing Ris = 10 ohm Maximum Parameter defining maximum earthing resistance, setting earthing Ris must be always set in case Operation principle = “Touch...
Page 632 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 341: Permissible time-touch voltage characteristics given in standard EN 50522 • Time margin for practical circuit-breaker operate time can be applied with CB delay Comp . Default setting is 0 ms. setting • START and ST_EF outputs are activated when estimated touch voltage (considering the effect of settings Reduction factor and Enable harmonics ) Touch Vol Str Val and earth fault is detected and earth-fault...
Page 633 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Reduction factor and Maximum earthing Ris are used to scale the Settings estimated effective earth-fault current value into corresponding touch voltage or earth-potential rise estimate. UTp multiplier enables operation based on permissible earth potential Setting rise U , by scaling of the permissible time-touch voltage characteristics given in standard EN 50522 with Setting UTp multiplier , see table below.
Page 634 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A in terms of fault resistance depends also on the network parameters Equation 107 (nominal voltage, damping and detuning) as described by (Equation 107) where U is the nominal phase-to-earth voltage [V], I is the total system damping Touch Vol Str Val in primary volts and R [A], I is the detuning [A], U...
Page 635 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 342: Operation timer characteristic of IFPTOC function when Operation principle = “Touch voltage based”, Operating curve type = “Inverse time EN50522” and Operating curve type = 1.0. Characteristics are according to standard EN50522. Maximum earthing Ris = 10 ohm. Operation principle = “Touch Example 5b.
Page 636 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 343: Operation timer characteristic of IFPTOC function when Operation principle = “Touch voltage based”, Operating curve type = “Inverse time EN50522” and UTp multiplier = 2.0. Characteristics are according to standard EN50522. Maximum earthing Ris = 10 ohm. Operation principle = “Touch Example 5c.
Page 637 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 344: Operation timer characteristic of IFPTOC function when Operation principle = “Touch voltage based”, Operating curve type = “Inverse time EN50522” and UTp multiplier = 4.0. Characteristics are according to standard EN50522. Maximum earthing Ris = 10 ohm. Operating curve type = “Inverse time IEEE80”...
Page 638 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 345: Permissible time-touch voltage characteristics given in standard IEEE80 (metal-to-metal contact). • This operation mode can be also used when maximum allowed earthing voltage, i.e. earth potential rise, vs. operation speed follows a relationship such as 750V/ t [ sec ].
Page 639 2NGA002468 A Protection functions (Equation 109) For body weight of 70 kg: (Equation 110) where is the surface layer derating factor ρ is the surface material resistivity in Ω·m ρ is the resistivity of the earth beneath the surface material in Ω·m ρ...
Page 640 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A ρ ρ = 0 into IFPTOC. The numerical values assume body weight of 70 kg, IEEE multiplier equals 157. Ω·m, then Fault duration t [sec.] Permissible touch voltage, U 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.50 1.00 2.00 5.00 10.00 In some countries, safety during an earth fault is defined in terms of highest allowed earth potential rise (EPR) as a function of fault duration.
Page 641 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Reduction factor considers the fact that only part of the earth- Setting fault current (I ) will flow back through “remote” earth and introduces earth potential rise and touch voltages. Operating curve type = “Inverse time IEEE80” is selected, then When UTp multiplier is not effective.
Page 642 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 346: Operation timer characteristic of IFPTOC function when Operation principle = “Touch voltage based”, Operating curve type = “Inverse time IEEE80” and IEEE multiplier = 500. Characteristics are according to standard IEEE80. Maximum earthing Ris = 10ohm. IFPTOC Cross-country fault protection In high impedance earthed networks, single phase earth fault introduces over- voltages in the healthy phases.
Page 643 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 347: Simplified illustration of a cross-country fault between phases A and C, where two simultaneous single-phase earth faults occur in two different locations and two different phases in the network IFPTOC has an in-build dedicated functionality for cross-county fault detection and tripping.
Page 644 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A (Equation 114) where = Uncompensated earth-fault current of the network taking into account the eNet decentralized compensation. 3I> = Setting of the low-set overcurrent stage of the protected feeder The magnitude of the minimum expected cross-country fault current can be coarsely estimated based on the knowledge of the maximum earthing resistance Maximum earthing Ris , of all the feeders in the substation, and using the values,...
Page 645 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Phase-to-phase under-voltage criterion Monitoring of the magnitude of any phase-to-phase voltage (U or U ) and XC stage PP V Val during a detected earth fault: comparing it to setting (Equation 116) During a single-phase earth fault phase-to-phase voltages are not affected, but during a cross-country fault the phase-to-phase voltages are affected, refer to Figure 348 XC stage PP V Val is 0.9xU...
Page 646 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A (Equation 117) where = Estimate of the highest phase-to-phase voltage during cross-country fault PP_XC with minimum expected cross-country fault current according to Equation 117 Example 2: • = 20 kV n_PP Maximum earthing Ris = 15 ohm •...
Page 647 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 349: Illustration of fault current magnitude and phase-to-phase voltage magnitude during a cross-country fault as a function of fault resistance. Note that fault resistance equals the average of fault resistances R and R = 20 kV, X n_PP = 2.2 ohm, R = 0.2 ohm.
Page 648 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Enable XC Op mode = In case tripping of cross-country fault is enabled (setting “on”), then operation of IFPTOC requires that simultaneously both the magnitude of calculated residual current (I ) and estimated earth-fault current ( ) exceeds XC stage A Str Val during a detected earth fault: setting...
Page 649: Internal Start
2NGA002468 A Protection functions The IFPTOC has inbuild directional transient detector module for detecting earth- fault transients. Transient detector module is used to count the number of transients during an earth fault to discriminate intermittent earth fault from continuous earth fault. Transient detector module counts the number of transients during an earth fault both in faulty and healthy feeders.
Page 650 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Intr EF counter Lim (so actually for operation there must be Intr exceeds setting EF counter Lim +1 detected transients). OPERATE output activation occurs always at time of detected transient. OPERATE output signal has fixed length of 100 ms, but OP_INTR_EF signal is activated for only one cycle time i.e.
Page 651 2NGA002468 A Protection functions IFPTOC Switch onto fault protection During switch onto fault condition i.e. when breaker is closed into existing fault, earth-fault current estimate may be disturbed by the inrush currents of energized transformers. Therefore, IFPTOC includes a dedicated switch onto fault (SOTF) logic module.
Page 652 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Switch-onto-fault (SOTF) logic module enabling requires connection of breaker close command into input CB_CL_CMD. Switch-onto-fault (SOTF) logic module can be disabled by not connecting the breaker close command signal to IFPTOC. In case SOTF condition is detected, then all other functionality of IFPTOC function is blocked.
Page 653 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Faulted phase information is not given in case of cross-country fault (XC_FLT = TRUE). IFPTOC Fault resistance estimation Protection function IFPTOC includes fault resistance (R ) magnitude estimation based on information on the faulted phase, the faulted phase voltage and estimated earth fault current magnitude (fundamental frequency).
Page 654 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A The timer calculates the start duration value, which indicates the percentage elapse of operate timer, 100% means that operate time is completely elapsed and OPERATE output is activated. The value is available in the Recorded data as Start duration and in Monitored data as START_DUR.
Page 655 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Activation of OPERATE output results to automatic triggering of fault recording. The recording function of IFPTOC includes recorded data 1 data objects as shown in Table 669 Table 669: Recorded data 1 data objects of the IFPTOC function Parameter name Parameter description Recorded Data DO...
Page 656 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.2.12.6 Signals IFPTOC Input signals Table 670: IFPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents IRES SIGNAL Residual current SIGNAL Three-phase voltages URES SIGNAL Residual voltage EXT_RELEASE BOOLEAN 0=False External GFC start signal, alternative for internal GFC module.
Page 657 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Name Type Description touch voltage according to the standards OP_XC BOOLEAN Operate signal according to cross-country stage earth- fault module OP_SOTF BOOLEAN Operate signal according to SOTF-module OP_INTR_EF BOOLEAN Operate signal according to intermittent earth-fault mod- PEAK_IND BOOLEAN Current transient detection...
Page 658 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description DT stage Op time 100...60000 Operate delay time for Touch volt- age/fault current estimation module, DT timer IDMT stage Min Op 50...6000 Minimum operate delay time for touch voltage/fault current estimation module IDMT tim- er according to...
Page 659 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 3=No validity EF validity Min Curr 0.005...0.200 0.001 0.010 Minimum current for EF validity eval- uation. Note that In means residual nominal current. Ena cyclic reset 1=Enable Enable adaptation 0=Disable of fault direction 1=Enable...
Page 660 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description continuous earth fault. CB delay Comp 0...200 Delay compensa- tion for circuit- breaker operate time 4.2.12.8 IFPTOC Monitored data Table 676: IFPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description FLT_CURRENT FLOAT32...
Page 661 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off Triggering time Timestamp Triggering time Residual voltage FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 Residual voltage magni- tude Residual current FLOAT32 0.00...64.00 Residual current magni- tude Touch voltage FLOAT32 0.00...440000.00 Touch voltage magni- tude Touch voltage rms FLOAT32...
Page 662 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Residual current FLOAT32 0.00...64.00 Residual current magni- tude Touch voltage FLOAT32 0.00...440000.00 Touch voltage magni- tude Touch voltage rms FLOAT32 0.00...440000.00 Touch voltage including harmonics Fault current FLOAT32 0.00...6000.00 Fault current magni- tude Fault current rms FLOAT32...
Page 663: Unbalance Protection
2NGA002468 A Protection functions Characteristics Value ±1% of the set value or ±0.005 × I Accuracy of follows accuracy. Residual voltage: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Residual current: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I (at currents ≤10 x I , when Uo is nominal) ±5.0% of the set value (at currents >...
Page 664 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.3.1.2 NSPTOC Function block Figure 352: NSPTOC Function block 4.3.1.3 NSPTOC Functionality The negative-sequence overcurrent protection function NSPTOC is used for increasing sensitivity to detect single-phase and phase-to-phase faults or unbalanced loads due to, for example, broken conductors or unsymmetrical feeder voltages.
Page 665 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Operation setting. The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of NSPTOC can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. Timer Level detector...
Page 666 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Operating curve the timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the type , Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic Reset delay time value is exceeded. is selected, the reset timer runs until the set When the IDMT curves are selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to "Immediate", "Def time reset"...
Page 667 2NGA002468 A Protection functions for earth faults taking place on the wye-connected low voltage side. If an earth fault occurs on the wye-connected side of the power transformer, negative sequence current quantities appear on the delta-connected side of the power transformer. The most common application for the negative sequence overcurrent protection is probably rotating machines, where negative sequence current quantities indicate unbalanced loading conditions (unsymmetrical voltages).
Page 668 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 6=L.T.E. inv. 7=L.T.V. inv. 8=L.T. inv. 9=IEC Norm. inv. 10=IEC Very inv. 11=IEC inv. 12=IEC Ext. inv. 13=IEC S.T. inv. 14=IEC L.T. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time 17=Programmable 18=RI type 19=RD type Table 683: NSPTOC Group settings (Advanced) Parameter...
Page 669: Negative-Sequence Overcurrent Protection Xnsptoc (Ansi 46)
2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.3.1.9 NSPTOC Monitored data Table 686: NSPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time NSPTOC Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.3.1.10 NSPTOC Technical data Table 687: NSPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value...
Page 670 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.3.2 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection XNSPTOC (ANSI 4.3.2.1 XNSPTOC Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Negative-sequence overcurrent pro- XNSPTOC XI2> tection 4.3.2.2 XNSPTOC Function block XNSPTOC1 OPERATE START BLOCK ENA_MULT Figure 354: XNSPTOC Function block 4.3.2.3 XNSPTOC Functionality...
Page 671 2NGA002468 A Protection functions blocks in this document. The configuration can be written to the protection relay once the mismatch is corrected. 4.3.2.5 XNSPTOC Operation principle Operation setting. The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The function can be described by using the module diagram in the figure below.
Page 672 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 356: start value behavior with ENA_MULT input activated Timer Once activated, the timer activates its’ Start output. Depending on the value of Operating curve type , the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT. the set Operate delay time in the When the operation timer has reached the value set by...
Page 673 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care since it may prevent the function to activate its operate signal independently of the current magnitude. For setting this parameter, the particular IDMT curve should be carefully studied. The timer calculates the start duration (START_DUR) value which indicates the percentual ratio of the latest start situation and the set operate time (DT or IDMT).
Page 674 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A The negative sequence overcurrent element is used where increased sensitivity for phase-to-phase faults is desired. In addition to the typical application of feeder protection, this element can also be applied on relays protecting a main bus breaker in medium to large distribution substations.
Page 675 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.3.2.9 XNSPTOC Settings Table 693: XNSPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.01...5.00 0.01 0.30 Start value Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 Multiplier for scal- ing the start value Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00...
Page 676 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description -24=Recloser F -25=Recloser G -26=Recloser H -27=Recloser J -28=Recloser Kg -29=Recloser Kp -30=Recloser L -31=Recloser M -32=Recloser N -33=Recloser P -34=Recloser R -35=Recloser T -36=Recloser V -37=Recloser W -38=Recloser Y -39=Recloser Z Op delay time IDMT 0...2000 Op delay time IDMT...
Page 677: Phase Discontinuity Protection Pdnsptoc (Ansi 46Pd)
2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.3.2.10 XNSPTOC Monitored data Table 697: XNSPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time XNSPTOC Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.3.2.11 XNSPTOC Technical data Table 698: XNSPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value...
Page 678 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.3.3.1 PDNSPTOC Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC I2/I1> 46PD 4.3.3.2 PDNSPTOC Function block Figure 357: PDNSPTOC Function block 4.3.3.3 PDNSPTOC Functionality The phase discontinuity protection function PDNSPTOC is used for detecting unbalance situations caused by broken conductors.
Page 679 2NGA002468 A Protection functions The operation of PDNSPTOC can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. Timer OPERATE Level detector START Blocking current logic check BLOCK Figure 358: Functional module diagram The I module calculates the ratio of the negative and positive sequence current.
Page 680 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset.
Page 681 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 360: Three-phase current quantities during the broken conductor fault in phase A with the ratio of negative-sequence and positive-sequence currents 4.3.3.7 Signals PDNSPTOC Input signals Table 700: PDNSPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents BLOCK BOOLEAN...
Page 682 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 703: PDNSPTOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Table 704: PDNSPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time...
Page 683: Voltage Protection
2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.3.3.11 PDNSPTOC Technical revision history Table 707: PDNSPTOC Technical revision history Product Technical Change connectivi revision ty level PCL1 Internal improvement Voltage protection 4.4.1 Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV (ANSI 59) 4.4.1.1 PHPTOV Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification...
Page 684 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 708: Analog inputs Input Description Three-phase voltages See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. There are a few special conditions which must be noted with the configuration. Table 709: Special conditions Condition Description U3P connected to real measurements...
Page 685 2NGA002468 A Protection functions be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return to the hysteresis area. Voltage selection setting is used for selecting phase-to-earth or phase-to- phase voltages for protection. For the voltage IDMT operation mode, the used IDMT curve equations contain Curve Sat Relative setting is used for preventing discontinuity characteristics.
Page 686 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Reset functionality Setting Type of Setting Type of Setting Reset reset curve time reset delay time taneously” when drop-off occurs Frozen timer Operation timer “Def time reset” “Freeze Op tim- Operate timer is is frozen during er”...
Page 687 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operate times. Minimum operate time setting parameter defines the minimum desired operate time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used. Minimum operate time setting should be used with care because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but always at least the Minimum operate time setting.
Page 688 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A The power frequency overvoltage may occur in the network due to contingencies such as: • The defective operation of the automatic voltage regulator when the generator is in isolated operation. • Operation under manual control with the voltage regulator out of service. A sudden variation of load, in particular the reactive power component, gives rise to a substantial change in voltage because of the inherent large voltage regulation of a typical alternator.
Page 689 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 19=Inv. Curve C 20=Programmable Table 715: PHPTOV Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate Selection of reset 1=Immediate curve type 2=Def time reset Type of time reset 1=Freeze Op timer Selection of time...
Page 690 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.4.1.10 PHPTOV Monitored data Table 718: PHPTOV Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time PHPTOV Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.4.1.11 PHPTOV Technical data Table 719: PHPTOV Technical data Characteristic Value...
Page 691: Three-Phase Overvoltage Protection With 1-Phase Trip Option Sphptov
2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.4.2 Three-phase overvoltage protection with 1-phase trip option SPHPTOV (ANSI 59) 4.4.2.1 SPHPTOV Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase overvoltage SPHPTOV 3U> protection with 1-phase trip option 4.4.2.2 SPHPTOV Function block SPHPTOV1 OPERATE...
Page 692 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. There are a few special conditions which must be noted with the configuration. Table 722: Special conditions Condition Description U3P connected to real measure- The function can work with one voltage channel con- Num of start phases is set to "1 out of 3".
Page 693 2NGA002468 A Protection functions U_A_AB Timer OPERATE_A Phase U_B_BC Level OPERATE_B Selection detector U_C_CA logic OPERATE_C OPERATE Blocking BLOCK START_A logic START_B START_C Timer START Timer Figure 365: Functional module diagram Level detector The fundamental frequency component of the measured three-phase voltages is Start value setting.
Page 694 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Phase selection logic Phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the fault level is detected. Operation mode depends on the value of CB_OPR_MODE input. Table 723: Operation mode functionality depending on CB_OPR_MODE input Description of functionality value CB_OPR_MODE...
Page 695 2NGA002468 A Protection functions If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operation delay is exceeded, the reset state is activated. The behavior in the drop- off situation depends on the selected operation time characteristics. If the DT Reset delay time value characteristics are selected, the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time , the timer is...
Page 696 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 366: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes. The value for Type of reset curve is “Def time reset”. Also other reset modes are presented for the time integrator. Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operation times. The Minimum operate time setting parameter defines the minimum desired operation time for IDMT.
Page 697 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration > System > Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the relay program.
Page 698 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A • Sudden loss of load due to the tripping of outgoing feeders, leaving the generator isolated or feeding a very small load. This causes a sudden rise in the terminal voltage due to the trapped field flux and overspeed. If a load sensitive to overvoltage remains connected, it leads to equipment damage.
Page 699 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 17=Inv. Curve A 18=Inv. Curve B 19=Inv. Curve C 20=Programmable Table 730: SPHPTOV Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate Selection of reset 1=Immediate curve type 2=Def time reset...
Page 700: Three-Phase Undervoltage Protection Phptuv (Ansi 27)
Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.4.2.10 SPHPTOV Monitored data Table 733: SPHPTOV Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time SPHPTOV Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.4.2.11 SPHPTOV Technical data Table 734: SPHPTOV Technical data Characteristic Value...
Page 701 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.4.3.1 PHPTUV Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase undervoltage protec- PHPTUV 3U< tion 4.4.3.2 PHPTUV Function block Figure 367: PHPTUV Function block 4.4.3.3 PHPTUV Functionality The three-phase undervoltage protection function PHPTUV is used to disconnect from the network devices, for example electric motors, which are damaged when subjected to service under low voltage conditions.
Page 702 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Improper analog channel configuration causes a validation error if the analog channels are not completely configured or they do not match with certain settings. For troubleshooting, check the contents of this chapter and also the preprocessing blocks in this document.
Page 703 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Phase selection logic If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the fault level is detected. If the number of faulty Num of start phases , the phase selection logic activates phases match with the set the Timer.
Page 704 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 369: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes. Operate signal is based on settings Type of reset curve = “Def time reset” and Type of time reset= “Freeze Op timer”. The effect of other reset modes is also presented Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operate times.
Page 705 2NGA002468 A Protection functions by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay's program. The influence of the BLOCK input signal activation is preselected with the global Blocking mode setting. Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE output is not deactivated when blocking is activated.
Page 706 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.4.3.8 Signals PHPTUV Input signals Table 739: PHPTUV Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase voltages BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode PHPTUV Output signals Table 740: PHPTUV Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 707 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 5=off Num of start pha- 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases 1=1 out of 3 required for oper- 2=2 out of 3 ate activation 3=3 out of 3 Curve parameter A 0.005...200.000 0.001...
Page 708: Three-Phase Undervoltage Protection With 1-Phase Trip Option Sphptuv
Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.4.3.11 PHPTUV Technical data Table 746: PHPTUV Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured: ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Start time Minimum Typical Maximum = 0.85 ×...
Page 709 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase undervoltage protec- SPHPTUV 3U< tion with 1-phase trip option 4.4.4.2 SPHPTUV Function block SPHPTUV1 OPERATE OPR_A_AB BLOCK OPR_B_BC OPR_C_CA START ST_A_AB ST_B_BC ST_C_CA O:2|T:5|I:1 Figure 370: SPHPTUV Function block 4.4.4.3...
Page 710 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Improper analog channel configuration causes a validation error if the analog channels are not completely configured or they do not match with certain settings. For troubleshooting, check the contents of this chapter and also the preprocessing blocks in this document.
Page 711 2NGA002468 A Protection functions value setting. After leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition has to be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Voltage selection setting is used for selecting the phase-to-ground or phase-to- phase voltages for protection.
Page 712 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Description of output value CB_OPR_MODE is activated depending on the faulted phase. Once operation cri- terion is fulfilled, the timer activates OPR_A_AB OPR_B_BC outputs depending on the faulted phase. OPR_C_CA Outputs is activated once any phase specific out- START/OPERATE put is activated.
Page 713 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Figure 372: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes. The value for Type of reset curve is “Def time reset”. Also other reset modes are presented for the time integrator. Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operate times. Minimum Operate time setting parameter defines the minimum desired operate time for IDMT.
Page 714 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration > System > Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the relay program.
Page 715 2NGA002468 A Protection functions SPHPTUV prevents sensitive equipment from running under conditions that could cause overheating and thus shorten their life time expectancy. In many cases, SPHPTUV is a useful function in circuits for local or remote automation processes in the power system.
Page 716 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 757: SPHPTUV Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate Selection of reset 1=Immediate curve type 2=Def time reset Type of time reset 1=Freeze Op timer Selection of time 1=Freeze Op timer reset 2=Decrease Op tim-...
Page 717: Residual Overvoltage Protection Rovptov (Ansi 59G/ 59N)
2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.4.4.10 SPHPTUV Monitored data Table 760: SPHPTUV Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time SPHPTUV Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.4.4.11 SPHPTUV Technical data Table 761: SPHPTUV Technical data Characteristic Value...
Page 718 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.4.5.1 ROVPTOV Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV Uo> 59G/59N 4.4.5.2 ROVPTOV Function block Figure 373: ROVPTOV Function block 4.4.5.3 ROVPTOV Functionality The residual overvoltage protection function ROVPTOV is used in distribution networks where the residual overvoltage can reach non-acceptable levels in, for example, high impedance earthing.
Page 719 2NGA002468 A Protection functions For troubleshooting, check the contents of this chapter and also the preprocessing blocks in this document. The configuration can be written to the protection relay once the mismatch is corrected. 4.4.5.5 ROVPTOV Operation principle Operation setting. The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are "On"...
Page 720 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated. 4.4.5.6 ROVPTOV Application ROVPTOV is designed to be used for earth-fault protection in isolated neutral, resistance earthed or reactance earthed systems.
Page 721 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.4.5.8 ROVPTOV Settings Table 766: ROVPTOV Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.010...1.000 0.001 0.030 Residual overvolt- age start value Operate delay time 40...300000 Operate delay time Table 767: ROVPTOV Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 722: Positive-Sequence Overvoltage Protection Psptov (Ansi 59Ps)
Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Characteristic Value Operate time accuracy in definite ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms time mode Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × f , where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,… 4.4.5.11 ROVPTOV Technical revision history Table 771: ROVPTOV Technical revision history...
Page 723 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.4.6.4 PSPTOV Analog channel configuration PSPTOV has one analog group input which must be properly configured. Table 772: Analog inputs Input Description Three-phase voltages See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. There are a few special conditions which must be noted with the configuration.
Page 724 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Start value setting. After leaving the hysteresis input signal slightly varies from the area, the start condition has to be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return to the hysteresis area. Timer Once activated, Timer activates the START output.
Page 725 2NGA002468 A Protection functions PSPTOV Input signals Table 774: PSPTOV Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase voltages BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode PSPTOV Output signals Table 775: PSPTOV Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN...
Page 726: Negative-Sequence Overvoltage Protection Nsptov (Ansi 59Ns)
Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.4.6.10 PSPTOV Technical data Table 780: PSPTOV Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U 1, 2 Start time Minimum Typical Maximum = 1.1 ×...
Page 727 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.4.7.2 NSPTOV Function block Figure 377: NSPTOV Function block 4.4.7.3 NSPTOV Functionality The negative-sequence overvoltage protection function NSPTOV is used to detect negative sequence overvoltage conditions. NSPTOV is used for the protection of machines. The function starts when the negative sequence voltage exceeds the set limit. NSPTOV operates with the definite time (DT) characteristics.
Page 728 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A The operation of NSPTOV can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. Timer OPERATE Level detector START Blocking BLOCK logic Figure 378: Functional module diagram Level detector Start value setting.
Page 729 2NGA002468 A Protection functions component of the voltage. In rotating machines, the voltage unbalance results in a current unbalance, which heats the rotors of the machines. The rotating machines, therefore, do not tolerate a continuous negative-sequence voltage higher than typically 1-2 percent x U The negative-sequence component current I , drawn by an asynchronous or a synchronous machine, is linearly proportional to the negative-sequence component...
Page 730 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.4.7.8 NSPTOV Settings Table 786: NSPTOV Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.010...1.000 0.001 0.030 Start value Operate delay time 20...120000 Operate delay time Table 787: NSPTOV Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 731: Positive-Sequence Undervoltage Protection Psptuv (Ansi 27Ps)
2NGA002468 A Protection functions Characteristic Value Reset ratio Typically 0.96 Retardation time <35 ms Operate time accuracy in definite ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms time mode Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × f , where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…...
Page 732 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A The function starts when the positive-sequence voltage drops below the set limit. PSPTUV operates with the definite time (DT) characteristics. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, the definite timer or the function itself. 4.4.8.4 PSPTUV Analog channel configuration PSPTUV has one analog group input which must be properly configured.
Page 733 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Timer OPERATE Level detector START Blocking BLOCK logic Figure 380: Functional module diagram. U1 is used for representing positive phase sequence voltage. Level detector Start value setting. The calculated positive-sequence voltage is compared to the set Start value , the level detector enables the timer.
Page 734 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated. 4.4.8.6 PSPTUV Application PSPTUV can be applied for protecting a power station used for embedded generation when network faults like short circuits or phase-to-earth faults in a transmission or a distribution line cause a potentially dangerous situations for the power station.
Page 735 2NGA002468 A Protection functions PSPTUV Input signals Table 794: PSPTUV Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase voltages BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode PSPTUV Output signals Table 795: PSPTUV Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN...
Page 736: Voltage Vector Shift Protection Vvsppam (Ansi 78Vs)
Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.4.8.9 PSPTUV Monitored data Table 800: PSPTUV Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time PSPTUV Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.4.8.10 PSPTUV Technical data Table 801: PSPTUV Technical data Characteristic Value...
Page 737 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.4.9 Voltage vector shift protection VVSPPAM (ANSI 78VS) 4.4.9.1 VVSPPAM Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Voltage vector shift protection VVSPPAM 78VS 4.4.9.2 VVSPPAM Function block Figure 381: VVSPPAM Function block 4.4.9.3 VVSPPAM Functionality The voltage vector shift protection function VVSPPAM, also known as vector surge...
Page 738 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Improper analog channel configuration causes a validation error if the analog channels are not completely configured or they do not match with certain settings. For troubleshooting, check the contents of this chapter and also the preprocessing blocks in this document.
Page 739 2NGA002468 A Protection functions sequence voltage U1SHIFT, which resulted in the activation of last OPERATE output, are available in the Monitored data view. The activation of BLOCK input deactivates the INT_BLKD output. Figure 383: Vector shift during Loss of Mains Pulse timer Once the Pulse timer is activated, it activates the OPERATE output.
Page 740 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A dead time, the generators in the network tend to drift out of synchronism with the grid and reconnecting them without synchronizing may damage the generators introducing high currents and voltages in the neighboring network. To avoid these technical challenges, protection is needed to disconnect the distributed generation once it is electrically isolated from the main grid supply.
Page 741 2NGA002468 A Protection functions VVSPPAM Input signals Table 805: VVSPPAM Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase voltages BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode VVSPPAM Output signals Table 806: VVSPPAM Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN...
Page 742 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.4.9.9 VVSPPAM Monitored data Table 811: VVSPPAM Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description VEC_SHT_A_AB FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Vector shift for phase to earth voltage A or phase to phase voltage VEC_SHT_B_BC FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Vector shift for phase to earth voltage B or phase to phase voltage VEC_SHT_C_CA...
Page 743: Frequency Protection
2NGA002468 A Protection functions Frequency protection 4.5.1 Frequency protection FRPFRQ (ANSI 81) 4.5.1.1 FRPFRQ Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Frequency protection FRPFRQ f>/f<,df/dt 4.5.1.2 FRPFRQ Function block Figure 384: FRPFRQ Function block 4.5.1.3 FRPFRQ Functionality The frequency protection function FRPFRQ is used to protect network components...
Page 744 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A There are a few special conditions which must be noted with the configuration. Table 815: Special conditions Condition Description U3P connected to real measurements The function requires that at least one phase or phase-to-phase voltage channel is connec- ted.
Page 745: Operation
2NGA002468 A Protection functions df/dt detection The frequency gradient detection module includes a detection for a positive or Start value df/dt negative rate-of-change (gradient) of frequency based on the set value. The negative rate-of-change protection is selected when the set value is negative.
Page 746 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Operation mode Description Operate Tm Freq timer has reached the value set by the setting, the outputs are activated. OPERATE OPR_OFRQ If the frequency restores before the module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the timer reaches the value set by the Reset delay Tm Freq setting, the operate timer resets and the...
Page 747 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Operation mode Description Freq< OR df/dt A parallel operation between the protection methods is en- abled. The output is activated when either of the START measured values of the protection module exceeds its set value. Detailed information about the active module is availa- ble at the outputs.
Page 748 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration > System > Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay's program.
Page 749 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.5.1.7 Signals FRPFRQ Input signals Table 818: FRPFRQ Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase voltages BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode FRPFRQ Output signals Table 819: FRPFRQ Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 750 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value df/dt -0.2000...0.2000 xFn/s 0.0001 0.0100 Frequency start val- ue rate of change Operate Tm Freq 80...5400000 Operate delay time for frequency Operate Tm df/dt 120...200000 Operate delay time for frequency rate of change Table 821: FRPFRQ Non group settings (Basic)
Page 751: Load-Shedding And Restoration Lshdpfrq (Ansi 81Lsh)
2NGA002468 A Protection functions Characteristic Value df/dt <120 ms Reset time <150 ms Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±30 4.5.1.11 FRPFRQ Technical revision history Table 825: FRPFRQ Technical revision history Product Technical Change connectivi revision ty level PCL1 Added support for definite operate time mode selection (global setting).
Page 752 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.5.2.3 LSHDPFRQ Functionality The load-shedding and restoration function LSHDPFRQ is capable of performing load-shedding based on underfrequency and the rate of change of the frequency. The load that is shed during the frequency disturbance can be restored once the frequency has stabilized to the normal level.
Page 753 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.5.2.5 LSHDPFRQ Operation principle Operation setting. The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of LSHDPFRQ can be described using a module diagram. All the modules are explained in the next sections.
Page 754 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A df/dt detection The df/dt detection measures the input frequency calculated from the voltage signal and calculates its gradient. A high df/dt condition is detected by comparing Start value df/dt setting. The df/dt detection is activated when the gradient to the Start value the frequency gradient decreases at a faster rate than the set value of...
Page 755 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Frequency Start value Freq set at 0.975 xFn [Hz] Start value df/dt set at -0.020 xFn/s 50 Hz Operate Tm df/dt = 500ms Operate Tm Freq = 1000ms Load shed mode = Freq< AND df/dt 49 Hz 48.75 Hz Time [s] ST_FRG...
Page 756 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Frequency Start value Freq set at 0.975 xFn [Hz] Start value df/dt set at -0.020 xFn/s Operate Tm df/dt = 500ms 50 Hz Operate Tm Freq = 1000ms Load shed mode = Freq< AND df/dt 49 Hz Time [s] ST_FRG 500ms...
Page 757 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Restoring mode Description Restore start Val setting. The manual restoration cy has exceeded the includes a timer with the DT characteristics. When the timer has Restore delay time setting, the reached the set value of the RESTORE output is activated if the restoring condition still persists.
Page 758 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A underfrequency situation, the load-shedding trips out the unimportant loads to stabilize the network. Thus, loads are normally prioritized so that the less important loads are shed before the important loads. During the operation of some of the protective schemes or other system emergencies, the power system is divided into small islands.
Page 759 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Frequency [Hz] 50 Hz 48.8 Hz Time [s] START OPERATE ST_REST RESTORE Set Restore delay time Restore timer Timer Timer Timer starts suspended continues Figure 390: Operation of the load-shedding function Power system protection by load-shedding The decision on the amount of load that is required to be shed is taken through the measurement of frequency and the rate of change of frequency (df/dt).
Page 760 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A for the underfrequency can be set from a few seconds to a few fractions of a second stepwise from a higher frequency value to a lower frequency value. Table 828: Setting for a five-step underfrequency operation Load-shedding steps Start value Freq setting Operate Tm Freq setting...
Page 761 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Load-shedding steps Restore start Val setting Restore delay time setting 0.990 · Fn (49.5 Hz) 50000 ms 0.990 · Fn (49.5 Hz) 10000 ms 4.5.2.7 Signals LSHDPFRQ Input signals Table 831: LSHDPFRQ Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL...
Page 762 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 8=Freq< AND df/dt Restore mode 1=Disabled Mode of operation 1=Disabled of restore function- 2=Auto ality 3=Manual Start value Freq 0.8000...1.2000 0.0001 0.9750 Frequency set- ting/start value Start value df/dt -0.2000...-0.0050 xFn/s 0.0001...
Page 763: Power Protection
2NGA002468 A Protection functions Characteristic Value ± 2.0% of the set value (in range 5 Hz/s < |df/dt| < 15 Hz/s) Start time f< <80 ms df/dt <120 ms Reset time <150 ms Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±30 ms 4.5.2.11 LSHDPFRQ Technical revision history Table 838: LSHDPFRQ Technical revision history...
Page 764 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.6.1.3 DUPPDPR Functionality The underpower protection function DUPPDPR is used for protecting generators and prime movers against the effects of very low power outputs or reverse power condition. The function operates when the measured active power falls below the set value. The operating characteristics are according to definite time DT.
Page 765 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Timer OPERATE Directional Level calculation detector START Power calculation U_A_AB U_B_BC U_C_CA DISABLE Blocking BLOCK logic Figure 392: Functional module diagram Power calculation This module calculates the apparent power based on the selected voltage and Table 841 Measurement mode setting current measurements as described in .
Page 766 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Measurement mode setting Power calculation PhsCA ⋅ ⋅ − PhsA = ⋅ ⋅ PhsB = ⋅ ⋅ PhsC = ⋅ ⋅ If all three phase voltages and phase currents are fed to the protection relay, the positive-sequence alternative is recommended (default). Measurement mode , the power calculation calculates active Depending on the set power, reactive power and apparent power values from the available set of...
Page 767 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Operating operating area area Start Value Figure 393: Operating characteristics of DUPPDPR with setting Start value Timer Once activated, the Timer activates the START output. The time characteristics are according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time , the OPERATE output is activated.
Page 768 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated. 4.6.1.6 DUPPDPR Application The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy into electrical energy.
Page 769 2NGA002468 A Protection functions DUPPDPR Output signals Table 843: DUPPDPR Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.6.1.8 DUPPDPR Settings Table 844: DUPPDPR Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.01...2.00 0.01 0.10 Start value...
Page 770: Reverse Power-Directional Overpower Protection Doppdpr (Ansi 32R/32O)
Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description PF_ANGLE FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Power factor angle DUPPDPR Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.6.1.10 DUPPDPR Technical data Table 848: DUPPDPR Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the meas- ured current and voltage: ±2 Hz Power measurement accuracy ±3% of the set...
Page 771 2NGA002468 A Protection functions 4.6.2.1 DOPPDPR Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Reverse power/directional over- DOPPDPR P>/Q> 32R/32O power protection 4.6.2.2 DOPPDPR Function block Figure 394: DOPPDPR Function block 4.6.2.3 DOPPDPR Functionality The reverse power/directional overpower protection function DOPPDPR can be used for generator protection against delivering an excessive power beyond the generator's capacity to the grid, against the generator running like a motor, and against the motor running like a generator and for protecting a motor which...
Page 772 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A Table 851: Special conditions Condition Description U3P connected to real meas- The function can work with the corresponding one volt- Measurement mode is set to urements age channel connected if the "PhsAB", "PhsBC", "PhsCA", "PhsA", "PhsB" or "PhsC". The function requires that at least two (the third voltage will be derived) or all three voltage channels are connected for the other measurement modes.
Page 773 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Table 852: Power calculation Measurement mode setting Power calculation PhsA, PhsB, PhsC Arone ⋅ − ⋅ Pos Seq = ⋅ ⋅ PhsAB ⋅ ⋅ − PhsBC ⋅ ⋅ − PhsCA ⋅ ⋅ − PhsA = ⋅ ⋅...
Page 774 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A The calculated powers S, P, Q and the power factor angle PF_ANGL are available in the Monitored data view. Level detector The Level detector compares the magnitude of the measured apparent power to the Start value . If the measured value exceeds the set Start value , the Level detector sends an enabling signal to the Timer module.
Page 775 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Operating area Start value  Non operating area Figure 397: Operating characteristics with the Start Value setting, Power angle (α) being +45 and Directional mode "Forward" Timer Once activated, the Timer activates the START output. The time characteristics are Operate delay according to DT.
Page 776 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A turbines. It can also be used in feeder protection applications, for example, the ring network. DOPPDPR in the forward direction can be used to protect the generators or motors from delivering or consuming excess power. For example, the generator overpower protection can be used to shed a noncritical feeder load or to start parallel generators.
Page 777 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Operating area Operating Non operating area operating area area (a ) Figure 398: Forward active overpower characteristics (a) and forward reactive overpower characteristics (b) Operating operating area area operating area Operating area Figure 399: Reverse active overpower characteristics (a) and reverse reactive overpower characteristics (b) 4.6.2.7 Signals...
Page 778 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A DOPPDPR Input signals Table 853: DOPPDPR Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents SIGNAL Three-phase voltages BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode DOPPDPR Output signals Table 854: DOPPDPR Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 779 2NGA002468 A Protection functions Table 857: DOPPDPR Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Pol reversal 0=False Reverse the defini- 0=False tion of the power 1=True direction 4.6.2.9 DOPPDPR Monitored data Table 858: DOPPDPR Monitored data Name Type...
Page 780 Protection functions 2NGA002468 A 4.6.2.11 DOPPDPR Technical revision history Table 860: DOPPDPR Technical revision history Product Technical Change connectivi revision ty level PCL1 Internal improvement REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 781: Protection Related Functions
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Protection related functions Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR (ANSI 68HB) 5.1.1 INRPHAR Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR 3I2f> 68HB 5.1.2 INRPHAR Function block Figure 400: INRPHAR Function block 5.1.3 INRPHAR Functionality The three-phase inrush detector function INRPHAR is used to detect transformer...
Page 782: Inrphar Operation Principle
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. Improper analog channel configuration causes a validation error if the analog channels are not completely configured or they do not match with certain settings. For troubleshooting, check the contents of this chapter and also the preprocessing blocks in this document.
Page 783: Inrphar Application
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions elapsed and the inrush situation still exists, the Timer module output remains Start value , that is, until the active until the I_2H/I_1H ratio drops below the set inrush situation is over. If the drop-off situation occurs within the operate time up Reset delay time , counting, the reset timer is activated.
Page 784: Signals
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 402: Inrush current in transformer It is recommended to use the second harmonic and the waveform based inrush blocking from the transformer differential protection function TR2PTDF, if available. 5.1.7 Signals 5.1.7.1 INRPHAR Input signals Table 862: INRPHAR Input signals Name Type...
Page 785: Inrphar Settings
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions 5.1.8 INRPHAR Settings Table 864: INRPHAR Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 5...100 Ratio of the 2. to the 1. harmonic leading to restraint Operate delay time 20...60000 Operate delay time Table 865: INRPHAR Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range)
Page 786: Inrphar Technical Revision History
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Characteristic Value ±1.5 % of the set value or ±0.002 × I Ratio I2f/I1f measurement: ±5.0 % of the set value Reset time +35 ms / -0 ms Reset ratio Typically 0.96 Operate time accuracy +35 ms / -0 ms 5.1.11 INRPHAR Technical revision history...
Page 787: Ccbrbrf Analog Channel Configuration
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions 5.2.3 CCBRBRF Functionality The circuit breaker failure protection function CCBRBRF is activated by trip commands from the protection functions. The commands are either internal commands to the terminal or external commands through binary inputs. The start command is always a default for three-phase operation.
Page 788 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Level detector 1 Timer 1 POSCLOSE Retrip TRRET Start logic logic START Timer 2 Back-up Level IRES TRBU trip detector 2 logic Timer 3 CB_FAULT CB_FAULT_AL BLOCK Figure 404: Functional module diagram Level detector 1 Current value .
Page 789 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Table 872: Start logic operation Value of setting CB Value of setting CB Start logic reset condition failure mode failure trip mode Current value Current 1 out of 3 All phase currents drop below setting. 1 out of 4 All phase currents drop below Current value...
Page 790 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Value of setting CB Value of setting CB Start logic reset condition failure mode failure trip mode Current • The residual current drops below value Res setting and (at least) two pha- ses are below Current value setting.
Page 791 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions this setting is made as low as possible at the same time as any unwanted operation is avoided. A typical setting is 90 - 150 ms, which is also dependent on the retrip timer. The minimum time delay for the CB failure delay can be estimated as: CBfailuredelay Retriptime t ≥...
Page 792 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Table 873: Retrip logic operation Value of setting CB Value of setting CB Retrip functionality fail retrip mode failure mode Retrip functionality switched off. TRRET Current not activated. Breaker status Both(AND) Both(OR Without Check is activated after Timer 1 elapses. TRRET Current Breaker status...
Page 793 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Timer 1 elapsed From Timer 1 CB fail retrip mode ”Without check” TRRET CB fail retrip mode ”Current check” CB failure mode ”Current” CB failure mode ”Breaker status” CB failure mode ”Both(OR)” I > From Level detector 1 POSCLOSE CB failure mode ”Both(AND)”...
Page 794 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Value of setting CB Value of setting CB Conditions for activating Backup trip logic failure mode failure trip mode Cur- • Two or three phase currents exceed rent value setting. Breaker status CB is in closed position. 1 out of 3 1 out of 4 2 out of 4...
Page 795: Ccbrbrf Application
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL From Timer 3 Enable timer From Start logic Timer 2 elapsed From Timer 2 2 or 3 ph I > 1, 2 or 3 ph From level detector 1 TRBU CB failure trip mode ”2 out of 4"...
Page 796: Signals
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A CCBRBRF is initiated by operating different protection functions or digital logics inside the protection relay. It is also possible to initiate the function externally through a binary input. CCBRBRF can be blocked by using an internally assigned signal or an external signal from a binary input.
Page 797: Ccbrbrf Settings
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions 5.2.7.1 CCBRBRF Input signals Table 875: CCBRBRF Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents IRES SIGNAL Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block CBFP operation START BOOLEAN 0=False CBFP start command POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False CB in closed position CB_FAULT BOOLEAN...
Page 798: Ccbrbrf Monitored Data
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Table 878: CCBRBRF Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CB fault delay 0...60000 5000 Circuit breaker faul- ty delay Measurement 3=Peak-to-Peak Phase current 2=DFT mode measurement 3=Peak-to-Peak mode of function Trip pulse time 0...60000 Pulse length of ret-...
Page 799: Sccbrbrf Identification
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Circuit breaker failure protection 1ph/3ph SCCBRBRF (ANSI 50BF) 5.3.1 SCCBRBRF Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Circuit breaker failure protection SCCBRBRF 3I>/Io>BF 50BF 1ph/3ph 5.3.2 SCCBRBRF Function block SCCBRBRF1 CB_FAULT_AL TRBU...
Page 800: Sccbrbrf Analog Channel Configuration
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A 5.3.4 SCCBRBRF Analog channel configuration SCCBRBRF has two analog group inputs which must be properly configured. Table 882: Analog Inputs Input Description Three phase currents Necessary when CB failure mode is set other than "Breaker status" IRES Residual current (measured or calculated) CB failure mode is set other than "Breaker status"...
Page 801: Start Logic
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions > Current value BLOCK CB fail retrip mode=1 Retrip time START Trip pulse time Timer TRRET_A CB fail retrip mode=3 POSCLOSE CB failure mode=current CB failure mode=52 CB failure delay Trip pulse time Timer CB failure mode=Both TRBU_A CB fault delay Timer...
Page 802 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A or START_C. Typically, the start inputs are activated when any protection function operates and trips the circuit breaker. Trips from three phase protection functions are connected to START input and phasewise trips from protection functions are connected to the START_A, START_B and START_C inputs.
Page 803 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Value of setting Value of setting Start logic reset condition CB failure mode CB failure trip mode CB_OPR_MODE CB_OPR_MODE = Three phase = Single phase sidual current drops below Current vated, drop below Current value Res setting. value setting 2 out of 4 All phase CBs are in open position...
Page 804 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A CB failure mode ”Both(OR)” CB failure mode ”Both(AND)” 2 or 3 ph I > 1 ph From Level detector 1 > From Level detector 2 CB failure trip mode “2 out of 4" > From Level detector 2 I >...
Page 805 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions CB failure mode ”Both(OR)” CB failure mode ”Both(OR)” CB failure mode ”Both(AND)” CB failure mode ”Both(AND)” I_A > I_A > From Level detector 1 From Level detector 1 CB failure trip mode CB failure trip mode “1 out of 3"...
Page 806 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A It is often required that the total fault clearance time is less than the given critical time. This time is often dependent on the ability to maintain transient stability in case of a fault close to a power plant. Fault occurs Normal clearing time Normal fault...
Page 807 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Value of setting Value of setting Retrip functionality CB fail retrip mode CB failure mode CB_OPR_MODE CB_OPR_MODE = Three = Single phase phase Both(OR) Current check Current TRRET TRRET_X is activated after ret- is activated after rip timer elapses and any phase retrip timer elapses and phase current exceeds...
Page 808 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Retrip Timer elapsed CB fail retrip mode ”Without check” CB fail retrip mode TRRET ”Current check” CB failure mode ”Current” CB failure mode ”Breaker status” CB failure mode ”Both(OR)” I > From Level detector 1 POSCLOSE_A POSCLOSE_B POSCLOSE_C...
Page 809 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Retrip Timer For Phase A elapsed CB fail retrip mode ”Without check” CB fail retrip mode TRRET_A ”Current check” CB failure mode ”Current” CB failure mode ”Breaker status” CB failure mode ”Both(OR)” I_A > From Level detector 1 POSCLOSE_A CB failure mode ”Both(AND)”...
Page 810 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Value of setting Value of setting Conditions for activating Backup trip logic CB failure mode CB failure trip mode CB_OPR_MODE CB_OPR_MODE = Three = Single phase phase ceeds Current value Res setting • Two or three phase cur- Current value rents exceed setting...
Page 811 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions In most applications, "1 out of 3" is sufficient. Backtrip logic with START activation when CB_OPR_MODE is “Three phase” is shown Figure 417 BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL From CB Faulty Timer Enable timer From Start logic Backup Trip Timer elapsed 2 or 3 ph I >...
Page 812: Sccbrbrf Measuring Modes
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL From CB Faulty Timer Enable timer From Start logic TRBU Backup Trip Timer elapsed I_A > From level detector 1 CB failure trip mode ”1 out of 3" CB failure mode ”Current” CB failure mode ”Both(OR)” CB failure mode ”Both(AND)”...
Page 813: Signals
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions signal from a binary input. This signal blocks the function of the breaker failure protection even when the timers have started or the timers are reset. The retrip timer is initiated after the start input is set to true. When the pre-defined time setting is exceeded, SCCBRBRF issues the retrip and sends a trip command, for example, to the circuit breaker's second trip coil.
Page 814: Sccbrbrf Settings
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Default Description START_B BOOLEAN 0=False CBFP phase B start command START_C BOOLEAN 0=False CBFP phase C start command POSCLOSE_A BOOLEAN 0=False CB phase A in closed position POSCLOSE_B BOOLEAN 0=False CB phase B in closed position POSCLOSE_C BOOLEAN...
Page 815: Sccbrbrf Monitored Data
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CB failure mode 1=Current Operating mode of 1=Current function 2=Breaker status 3=Both CB fail retrip mode 1=Off Operating mode of 1=Off retrip logic 2=Without Check 3=Current check Retrip time 0...60000 Delay timer for ret- CB failure delay...
Page 816: Sccbrbcf Identification
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A 5.4.1 SCCBRBCF Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Circuit breaker close failure protec- SCCBRBCF tion 1ph/3ph 5.4.2 SCCBRBCF Function block SCCBRBCF1 BLOCK CLS_RETRY CLS_RETRY_A START CLS_RETRY_B START_A CLS_RETRY_C START_B START_C POSCLOSE_A...
Page 817 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions START START_A START_B CLS_RETRY START_C Close CLS_RETRY_A POS_CLOSE_A Failure CLS_RETRY_B POS_CLOSE_B Detection CLS_RETRY_C POS_CLOSE_C BLOCK CB_FAULT CB_OPR_MODE Figure 421: Functional module diagram Close failure detection Circuit breaker (CB) closing command is detected with binary input as follows: Table 892: Circuit breaker (CB) closing detection Breaker closing detection value...
Page 818: Sccbrbcf Application
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Table 894: Close retry conditions value Close retry functionality CB_OPR_MODE 1 (Three-phase) is activated when following conditions are valid: CLS_RETRY • Close failure timer elapsed • = FALSE, = FALSE and POS_CLOSE_A POS_CLOSE_B = FALSE (CB all poles are in open position) POS_CLOSE_C •...
Page 819: Sccbrbcf Settings
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions 5.4.6 Signals 5.4.6.1 SCCBRBCF Input signals Table 895: SCCBRBCF Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block CBFP operation START BOOLEAN 0=False CBFP start command START_A BOOLEAN 0=False CBFP phase A start command START_B BOOLEAN 0=False...
Page 820: Sccbrbcf Monitored Data
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 5=off Close delay time 0...60000 Delay timer for close retry Close pulse time 0...60000 Pulse length of close output 5.4.8 SCCBRBCF Monitored data Table 898: SCCBRBCF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 821: Trpptrc Functionality
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions 5.5.3 TRPPTRC Functionality The master trip function TRPPTRC is used as a trip command collector and handler after the protection functions. The features of this function influence the trip signal behavior of the circuit breaker. The minimum trip pulse length can be set when the non-latched mode is selected.
Page 822: Trpptrc Application
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A "Lockout" mode. It is also possible to reset the "Latched" mode remotely through a separate communication parameter. The minimum pulse trip function is not active when using the "Lockout" or "Latched" modes but only when the "Non-latched" mode is selected. If TRIP output is activated in "Latched"...
Page 823: Signals
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Figure 425: Typical TRPPTRC connection 5.5.6 Signals 5.5.6.1 TRPPTRC Input signals Table 901: TRPPTRC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block of function OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=False Operate RST_LKOUT BOOLEAN 0=False Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function 5.5.6.2...
Page 824: Trpptrc Settings
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A 5.5.7 TRPPTRC Settings Table 903: TRPPTRC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Trip pulse time 20...60000 Minimum duration of trip output sig- Trip output mode 1=Non-latched Select the opera-...
Page 825: Phiz Functionality
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions 5.6.2 PHIZ Function block Figure 426: PHIZ Function block 5.6.3 PHIZ Functionality A small percentage of earth faults have a very large impedance. They are comparable to load impedance and consequently have very little fault current. These high- impedance faults do not pose imminent danger to power system equipment.
Page 826 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A individual algorithms are further processed by a decision logic to provide the detection decision. The operation of PHIZ can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. Figure 427: Functional module diagram Filtering stage PHIZ uses multiple notch filters and a bandpass filter to extract the signatures of...
Page 827 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions The bandpass filter further filters out the frequencies outside the band of interest. There will be two output signals from the filtering stage – S1 is a band limited signal with certain frequencies removed from within the band, S2 is a band limited signal System type and Security level with further frequencies removed depending on the settings.
Page 828 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A impedance fault by playing back the field collected disturbance records of shorter duration (example 10s). The constant thresholds to be used for the statistical and Stat Lim playback wavelet algorithms for signals S1 and S2 can be set with settings S1 , Stat Lim playback S2 , Wave Lim playback S1 and Wave Lim playback S2 .
Page 829: Phiz Application
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions System type = “Grounded” System type = “Ungrounded” Security level = “1”…”9“ output is activated output is activated OPERATE OPERATE if energy value exceeding re- if energy value exceeding re- ported from: ported from: • Statistical energy S1 level •...
Page 830: Signals
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A However, a small percentage of the earth faults have a very large impedance. They are comparable to load impedance and consequently have very little fault current. These high-impedance faults do not pose imminent danger to power system equipment.
Page 831: Phiz Settings
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions 5.6.7.1 PHIZ Input signals Table 908: PHIZ Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents IRES SIGNAL Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode CB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0=False Circuit breaker closed input CB_OPEN BOOLEAN...
Page 832: Phiz Monitored Data
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 2=Ungrounded Stat Lim playback 0.00...1023.00 0.01 1023.00 Statistical thresh- old in playback mode for S1 Stat Lim playback 0.00...1023.00 0.01 1023.00 Statistical thresh- old in playback mode for S2 Wave Lim playback 0.00...1023.00 0.01...
Page 833: Fault Locator Scefrflo (Ansi Floc)
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions 5.6.10 PHIZ Technical revision history Table 914: PHIZ Technical revision history Product Technical Change connectivi revision ty level PCL1 Added input for hold, settings related to playback mode, breaker open delay and threshold reset as well as outputs for energy levels and thresholds Fault locator SCEFRFLO (ANSI FLOC) 5.7.1...
Page 834: Scefrflo Analog Channel Configuration
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A The fault distance calculation is based on the locally measured fundamental frequency current and voltage phasors. The full operation of SCEFRFLO requires all phase currents and phase-to-earth voltages to be measured. The fault distance estimate is obtained when SCEFRFLO is externally or internally triggered.
Page 835 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Phase selection Fault logic U_A_AB impedance ALARM U_B_BC distance U_C_CA calculation Trigger detection Recorded URES data TRIGG_REC Alarm indication TRIGG_XC0F TRIGG_T BLOCK Figure 431: Functional module diagram The fault distance calculation is done in two steps. First, the fault type is determined with the in-built Phase selection logic (PSL).
Page 836 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Table 917: Fault types and corresponding fault loops Fault type Description Flt loop No fault No fault Phase A-to-earth fault AG Fault Phase B-to-earth fault BG Fault Phase C-to-earth fault CG Fault Phase A-to-B short circuit AB Fault fault Phase B-to-C short circuit...
Page 837 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions 5.7.5.3 SCEFRFLO Fault loops “AG Fault” or “BG Fault” or “CG Fault” Fault loops “AG Fault”, “BG Fault” and “CG Fault” are used for single-phase-toearth faults. When the earth faults are located at different feeders, they are also applied in the case of two-phase-to-earth faults.
Page 838 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 432: Fault loop impedance for phase-to-earth fault loops “AG Fault”, “BG Fault” or “CG Fault” Flt Loc Det mode is used for selecting between different algorithms for the Setting calculation of the earth-fault distance. In case of compensated (resonant earthed) Flt Loc Det networks where an earth-fault current raising resistor is used, setting mode = "Comp, switched R"...
Page 839 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions tap corresponding to the total load of the feeder results in a voltage drop equal to (real). The dashed curve shows the voltage drop profile in this case. drop Figure 433: Description of the equivalent load distance Equivalent load Dis can be calculated based on the load flow and The exact value for voltage drop calculations using data from DMS-system and the following equation.
Page 840 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A maximum actual voltage drop takes place. This point is typically located at the end of the main line. As a result, the calculated value is stored in the recorded data Equivalent load Dis. EF algorithm Sel is equal to "Load modelling", the In addition, when the setting EF algorithm Cur Sel setting determines whether the used algorithm is based on zero-sequence "Io based"...
Page 841 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions The effect of loads is considered by applying “Load modelling” algorithm. The required settings of the algorithm are: • R1 = Positive-sequence resistance of the protected feeder [ohm, prim] • X1 = Positive-sequence reactance of the protected feeder [ohm, prim] •...
Page 842 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Zero Ris Curr change < 0.05–0.07xIn G0 (blue) and G0 difference (red) 0.025 Fault indication 0.02 Fault start transition settle-down 0.015 Settling down delay 0.01 0.005 Zero conductance gradient -0.005 rising edge -0.01 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700...
Page 843 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions fault Flt point resistance (Equation 133) fault Flt loop resistance (Equation 134) Flt loop reactance Flt phase reactance (Equation 135) Figure 435: Fault loop impedance for phase-to-phase fault loops (either “AB Fault”, “BC Fault” or “CA Fault”) The fault distance calculation algorithm for the phase-to-phase fault loops is Load Com PP loops and Enable simple model .
Page 844 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Flt loop resistance fault (Equation 137) Flt loop reactance Flt phase reactance (Equation 138) Figure 436: Fault loop impedance for a three-phase fault loop (“ABC Fault”) The three-phase fault distance is calculated with a special measuring element using positive-sequence quantities.
Page 845 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Figure 437: Definition of a physical fault point resistance in different fault loops Steady-state asymmetry and load compensation Power systems are never perfectly symmetrical. The asymmetry produces steady- state quantities in the form of zero-sequence and negative-sequence voltages and currents.
Page 846: Impedance Settings
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Table the fault distance estimation are detected, the Flt Dist quality is according to . In this case, the estimated fault distance (Flt distance) value is given on the HMI in parentheses. Table 919: Fault distance quality indicator Flt Dist quality Value Corresponding inaccuracy description Estimation stability criterion has not been reached...
Page 847 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions actual installation configuration. This minimizes the fault location errors caused by inaccurate settings. The positive-sequence reactance per unit and per phase can be calculated with a following approximation equation which applies to symmetrically transposed three- phase aluminium overhead lines without ground wires.
Page 848 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Name R1 [Ω/km] X1 [Ω/km] Al/Fe 93/39 Imatra 0.335 0.344 Al/Fe 108/23 Vaasa 0.287 0.344 Al/Fe 305/39 Duck 0.103 0.314 Table 922: Positive-sequence impedance values for typical 33 kV conductors, “Flat” tower configuration Name R1 [Ω/km] X1 [Ω/km] ACSR 50 sq.mm 0.529...
Page 849 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions the equivalent radius [m] for conductor bundle radius [m] for single conductor distance [m] between phases x and y Ph leakage Ris and Ph capacitive React settings Ph leakage Ris and Ph capacitive React settings are used for improving fault distance estimation accuracy for earth faults.
Page 850 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Ph capacitive React setting by SCEFRFLO can also determine the value for the Ph capacitive React is triggered by the binary measurements. The calculation of signal connected to the TRIGG_XC0F input when an earth-fault test is conducted outside the protected feeder during commissioning, for example, at the substation Calculation Trg mode has to be “External”.
Page 851 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions calculation and for conversion from reactance to physical fault distance. This option should be used only in the case of a homogeneous line, that is, when the protected feeder consists of only one conductor type. Line Len The impedance model with two line sections is enabled by setting both section A and Line Len section B to differ from zero.
Page 852 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Table 923: Impedance settings Parameter Impedance model with one Impedance model with three section sections R1 line section A 0.660 Ω/pu 0.236 Ω/pu X1 line section A 0.341 Ω/pu 0.276 Ω/pu Line Len section A 10.000 pu 4.000 pu R1 line section B...
Page 853 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Figure 442: Fault on a distribution line with spurs 5.7.5.4 SCEFRFLO Trigger detection The fault distance estimate is obtained when SCEFRFLO is triggered. The triggering Calculation Trg mode . The options for selection are method is defined with setting "External"...
Page 854 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A • Approximately two fundamental cycles after the fault occurrence, the stability criterion for fault distance estimate is fulfilled and the TRIGG_OUT event is sent. The recorded data values are stored at this moment. Figure 443: The behavior of fault distance estimate in time 5.7.5.5 SCEFRFLO Alarm indication SCEFRFLO contains an alarm output for the calculated fault distance.
Page 855: Scefrflo Measurement Modes
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Figure 444: An example of the ALARM output use 5.7.5.6 SCEFRFLO Recorded data All the information required for a later fault analysis is recorded to SCEFRFLO recorded data. In the protection relay, recorded data is found in Monitoring > Recorded data >...
Page 856: Scefrflo Application
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A VT connection is set to voltage dividers connected between the phase and earth ( VT connection “Wye”). Another alternative is to measure phase-to-phase voltages ( is set to “Delta”) and residual voltage (Uo). Both alternatives are covered by setting Phase voltage Meas to "Accurate".
Page 857: Signals
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions asymmetry elimination is based on the delta quantities. This applies to the short Load Com PP loops is set to "Enabled" or, to earth faults, when circuit faults when EF algorithm Sel is set to "Load compensation" or "Load modelling". 5.7.8 Signals 5.7.8.1...
Page 858 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Ph capacitive React 10...1000000 7000 Line PhE capaci- tive reactance in primary ohms R1 line section A 0.000...1000.000 ohm / pu 0.001 1.000 Positive sequence line resistance, line section A X1 line section A 0.000...1000.000...
Page 859: Scefrflo Monitored Data
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 5=off Phase voltage Meas 1=Accurate 1=Accurate Phase voltage measurement prin- 2=Ph-to-ph without ciple Calculation Trg 2=External Trigger mode 1=Internal mode for distance calcu- 2=External lation Table 930: SCEFRFLO Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 860 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description XFLOOP FLOAT32 0.00...3000.00 Fault loop reactance in primary ohms XFPHASE FLOAT32 0.00...3000.00 Positive sequence fault reactance in primary ohms IFLT_PER_ILD FLOAT32 0.00...60000.00 Fault to load current ra- S_CALC FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 Estimated equivalent load distance...
Page 861: Scefrflo Technical Data
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description V Pre Flt Phs B Magn FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Pre-fault voltage phase B, magnitude V Pre Flt Phs B Angl FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Pre-fault voltage phase B, angle V Pre Flt Phs C Magn FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Pre-fault voltage phase...
Page 862: Switch-Onto-Fault Protection Cvpsof (Ansi Sotf)
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A 5.7.12 SCEFRFLO Technical revision history Table 933: SCEFRFLO Technical revision history Product Technical Change connectivi revision ty level PCL1 Internal improvement Switch-onto-fault protection CVPSOF (ANSI SOTF) 5.8.1 CVPSOF Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification...
Page 863: Cvpsof Operation Principle
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions 5.8.4 CVPSOF Analog channel configuration CVPSOF has two analog group inputs which must be properly configured. Table 934: Analog inputs Input Description Three-phase currents, necessary when Operation mode is other than "Start" Three-phase voltages, necessary when Operation mode is other than "Start See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources.
Page 864 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A CB_CL_CMD START Trigger START_DLYD SOTF OPERATE Dead-line control detector SOTF detection BLOCK Figure 446: Functional module diagram Trigger This module is used for detecting a possible fault immediately after circuit breaker closing. The use of external protection function, typically the start signal from a non-directional distance zone or overcurrent stage, is required for fault indication.
Page 865 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Table 936: Options for dead line detection SOTF initialization Description SwitchCommand The dead line detection function is disabled. This operation mode must be applied when voltage transformers are loca- ted on the bus side of the circuit breaker. Voltage or SwitchCmd The dead line detection function is enabled and based sole- ly on the undervoltage condition.
Page 866: Cvpsof Application
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A is inactivated or the dead line condition disappears. Thus, the module becomes SOTF reset time is exceeded. inactive after the set Operation mode setting defines the When the SOTF control module is active, the operation criteria for the detection of a switch-onto-fault condition. The detection can be based on the external start signals from the distance or overcurrent functions, on the measured internal voltage and current levels, or on both.
Page 867: Signals
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions If a non-directional overcurrent is used for starting, the current setting must not be higher than what is required for the non-delayed and dependable tripping for a close-in three-phase fault during minimum source conditions. If the short-circuit current along the feeder is considerably higher than the maximum load currents, it is possible that the whole feeder length is covered by CVPSOF tripping.
Page 868: Cvpsof Settings
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A 5.8.7.2 CVPSOF Output signals Table 939: CVPSOF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate 5.8.8 CVPSOF Settings Table 940: CVPSOF Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Table 941: CVPSOF Non group settings (Advanced)
Page 869 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 870: Cvpsof Technical Data
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A 5.8.10 CVPSOF Technical data Table 943: CVPSOF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured: f ±2Hz Current: ±1.5 % of the set value or ±0.002 × I Voltage: ±1.5 % of the set value or ±0.002 × Operate time accuracy ±1.0 % of the set value or ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics...
Page 871: Dpsrdir Functionality
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions 5.9.3 DPSRDIR Functionality The three-phase power directional element function DPSRDIR is used to detect positive-sequence power direction. The output of the function is used for blocking or releasing other functions in protection scheme. The directional positive-sequence power protection contains a blocking functionality which blocks function output and resets Timer.
Page 872 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A DIRECTION Timer Directional RELEASE detector Low level blocking Blocking BLOCK logic Figure 448: Functional module diagram Directional detector The Directional detector module compares the angle of the positive-sequence current I1 to the angle of the positive-sequence voltage V1. Using the positive- sequence voltage angle as reference, the positive-sequence current angle is Characteristic angle setting.
Page 873: Dpsrdir Application
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Release delay time is exceeded, the Timer reset below the minimum level before Reset delay time , Timer is state is activated. If the drop-off continues for more than deactivated. Blocking logic The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the RELEASE output and resets Timer.
Page 874: Dpsrdir Monitored Data
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Max forward angle 0...90 Maximum phase angle in forward di- rection Max reverse angle 0...90 Maximum phase angle in reverse di- rection Min forward angle 0...90 Minimum phase an- gle in forward di- rection Min reverse angle...
Page 875: Neutral Power Directional Element Dnzsrdir (Ansi 67N-Tc)
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions 5.10 Neutral power directional element DNZSRDIR (ANSI 67N-TC) 5.10.1 DNZSRDIR Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Neutral power directional element DNZSRDIR I2->, Io-> 67N-TC 5.10.2 DNZSRDIR Function block Figure 449: DNZSRDIR Function block 5.10.3 DNZSRDIR Functionality...
Page 876: Dnzsrdir Operation Principle
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A 5.10.4 DNZSRDIR Analog channel configuration DNZSRDIR has four analog group inputs which must be properly configured. Table 954: Analog inputs Input Description Three-phase currents, necessary when Pol quantity is "Neg. seq. volt." IRES Residual current (measured or calculated), necessary when Pol quantity is "Zero seq.
Page 877 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions DIRECTION Timer Directional URES RELEASE detector IRES RCA_CTL Low level blocking Blocking BLOCK logic Figure 450: Functional module diagram Directional detector Pol quantity setting, the When "Neg. seq. volt." selection is made using the Directional detector module compares the angle of the negative-sequence current ) to the negative-sequence voltage (–U ).
Page 878 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Zero torque line Characteristic RCA=+45 deg Angle/ Max torque line forward angle Backward Forward forward area reverse angle area angle Min operate voltage reverse angle Min operate current Figure 451: Configurable directional setting when "Neg. seq. volt." selection is made using the Pol quantity setting Zero seq.
Page 879 2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Characteristic angle/ RCA = 0 deg Max torque line ( polarizing quantity) Forward area ( operating quantity) Min forward Max forward angle angle Zero torque line Non-operating area Non-operating area Min operate voltage Max reverse Min reverse angle angle...
Page 880 Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A ( polarizing quantity) RCA = -90 deg Max forward Forward Min reverse angle angle area Backward Characteristic Angle/ Max area Torque line (operating quantity) Min forward Max reverse angle angle Min operate voltage Min operate current zero torque line Figure 454: Configurable directional characteristics (RCA = -90˚) for an isolated network...
Page 881: Dnzsrdir Application
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions When the phase angle criterion is used, the DIRECTION output indicates on which operating sector the negative or residual power is measured. Low-level blocking For a reliable operation, signal levels should be greater than the minimum level. If they are not greater than the minimum level, Timer is blocked.
Page 882: Dnzsrdir Settings
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0=False Relay characteristic angle control 5.10.7.2 DNZSRDIR Output signals Table 959: DNZSRDIR Output signals Name Type Description RELEASE BOOLEAN Release signal if direction cri- teria is satisified...
Page 883: Dnzsrdir Monitored Data
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Table 962: DNZSRDIR Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Min operate current 1.0...100.0 10.0 Minimum operating current Min operate volt- 1.0...100.0 30.0 Minimum operating voltage Pol reversal 0=False...
Page 884: Mapgapc Functionality
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A 5.11.2 MAPGAPC Function block Figure 455: MAPGAPC Function block 5.11.3 MAPGAPC Functionality The multipurpose protection function MAPGAPC is used as a general protection with many possible application areas as it has flexible measuring and setting facilities.
Page 885: Mapgapc Application
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Operation mode types Table 965: Operation Mode Description "Under" If the input signal is lower than AI_VALUE the set value of the "Start value" setting, the level detector enables the timer module. "Over" If the input signal exceeds the set AI_VALUE Start value setting, the level de-...
Page 886: Signals
Protection related functions 2NGA002468 A The temperature protection using the RTD sensors can be done using the function block. The measured temperature can be fed from the RTD sensor to the function input that detects too high temperatures in the motor bearings or windings, for example.
Page 887: Mapgapc Monitored Data
2NGA002468 A Protection related functions Table 970: MAPGAPC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Absolute hysteresis 0.01...100.00 0.01 0.10 Absolute hysteresis for operation 5.11.8 MAPGAPC Monitored data Table 971: MAPGAPC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 888: Supervision Functions
Supervision functions 2NGA002468 A Supervision functions Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR (ANSI TCM) 6.1.1 TCSSCBR Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR 6.1.2 TCSSCBR Function block Figure 457: TCSSCBR Function block 6.1.3 TCSSCBR Functionality The trip circuit supervision function TCSSCBR is designed to supervise the control...
Page 889: Tcsscbr Application
2NGA002468 A Supervision functions Timer ALARM status BLOCK Figure 458: Functional module diagram TCS status This module receives the trip circuit status from the hardware. A detected failure in the trip circuit activates the timer. Timer Operate delay time has elapsed. Once activated, the timer runs until the set value of The time characteristic is according to DT.
Page 890 Supervision functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 459: Operation principle of the trip-circuit supervision, A is single-pole and B is double-pole connection If TCS is required only in a closed position, the external shunt resistance can be omitted. When the circuit breaker is in the open position, TCS sees the situation as a faulty circuit.
Page 891 2NGA002468 A Supervision functions Figure 460: Constant test current flow in parallel trip contacts and trip circuit supervision In case of parallel trip contacts, the recommended way to do the wiring is that the TCS test current flows through all wires and joints. REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 892 Supervision functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 461: Improved connection for parallel trip contacts where the test current flows through all wires and joints Several trip circuit supervision functions parallel in circuit Not only the trip circuit often have parallel trip contacts, it is also possible that the circuit has multiple TCS circuits in parallel.
Page 893 2NGA002468 A Supervision functions The circuit breaker coil current is normally cut by an internal contact of the circuit breaker. In case of a circuit breaker failure, there is a risk that the protection relay trip contact is destroyed since the contact is obliged to disconnect high level of electromagnetic energy accumulated in the trip coil.
Page 894 Supervision functions 2NGA002468 A Using power output contacts without trip circuit supervision If TCS is not used but the contact information of corresponding power outputs are required, the internal resistor can be by-passed. The output can then be utilized as a normal power output.
Page 895 2NGA002468 A Supervision functions Figure 463: Incorrect connection of trip-circuit supervision A connection of three protection relays with a double pole trip circuit is shown in the following figure. Only the protection relay R3 has an internal TCS circuit. In order to test the operation of the protection relay R2, but not to trip the circuit breaker, the upper trip contact of the protection relay R2 is disconnected, as shown in the figure, while the lower contact is still connected.
Page 896: Signals
Supervision functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 464: Incorrect testing of protection relays 6.1.6 Signals 6.1.6.1 TCSSCBR Input signals Table 975: TCSSCBR Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block input status 6.1.6.2 TCSSCBR Output signals Table 976: TCSSCBR Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 897: Tcsscbr Settings
2NGA002468 A Supervision functions 6.1.7 TCSSCBR Settings Table 977: TCSSCBR Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Operate delay time 1000...300000 3000 Operate delay time Table 978: TCSSCBR Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 898: Seqspvc Functionality
Supervision functions 2NGA002468 A 6.2.2 SEQSPVC Function block Figure 465: SEQSPVC Function block 6.2.3 SEQSPVC Functionality The fuse failure supervision function SEQSPVC is used to block the voltagemeasuring functions when failure occurs in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer (or combi sensor or voltage sensor) and merging unit to avoid misoperations of the voltage protection functions.
Page 899: Seqspvc Operation Principle
2NGA002468 A Supervision functions For troubleshooting, check the contents of this chapter and also the preprocessing blocks in this document. The configuration can be written to the protection relay once the mismatch is corrected. 6.2.5 SEQSPVC Operation principle Operation setting. The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are "On"...
Page 900 Supervision functions 2NGA002468 A Current and voltage delta criterion Change rate enable parameter The delta function can be activated by setting the to "True". Once the function is activated, it operates in parallel with the negative sequence-based algorithm. The current and voltage are continuously measured in all three phases to calculate: •...
Page 901 2NGA002468 A Supervision functions Table 983: Fuse failure output control Fuse failure detection criterion Conditions and function response Negative-sequence criterion If a fuse failure is detected based on the neg- ative sequence criterion, the out- FUSEF_U put is activated. If the fuse failure detection is active for more than five seconds and at the same time all the phase voltage values are below the set Seal in voltage setting with Ena-...
Page 902: Seqspvc Application
Supervision functions 2NGA002468 A The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates both FUSEF_U and FUSEF_3PH outputs. 6.2.6 SEQSPVC Application Some protection functions operate on the basis of the measured voltage value in the protection relay point. These functions can fail if there is a fault in the measuring circuits between the voltage transformer (or combi sensor or voltage sensor) and protection relay.
Page 903: Seqspvc Settings
2NGA002468 A Supervision functions 6.2.7.1 SEQSPVC Input signals Table 984: SEQSPVC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents SIGNAL Three-phase voltages BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block of function CB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0=False Active when circuit breaker is closed DISCON_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Active when line dis- connector is open...
Page 904: Seqspvc Monitored Data
Supervision functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description age for delta calcu- lation Min Op current del- 0.01...1.00 0.01 0.10 Minimum operate level of phase cur- rent for delta calcu- lation Seal in voltage 0.01...1.00 0.01 0.50 Operate level of seal-in phase volt- Enable seal in...
Page 905 2NGA002468 A Supervision functions 6.2.11 SEQSPVC Technical revision history Table 990: SEQSPVC Technical revision history Product Technical Change connectivi revision ty level PCL1 Internal improvement REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 906: Runtime Counter For Machines And Devices Mdsopt (Ansi Optm)
Supervision functions 2NGA002468 A Runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT (ANSI OPTM) 6.3.1 MDSOPT Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Runtime counter for machines and MDSOPT OPTS OPTM devices 6.3.2 MDSOPT Function block Figure 468: MDSOPT Function block 6.3.3 MDSOPT Functionality...
Page 907: Mdsopt Application
2NGA002468 A Supervision functions Figure 469: Functional module diagram Operation time counter This module counts the operation time. When POS_ACTIVE is active, the count is continuously added to the time duration until it is deactivated. At any time the OPR_TIME output is the total duration for which POS_ACTIVE is active. The unit of time duration count for OPR_TIME is hour.
Page 908: Signals
Supervision functions 2NGA002468 A Both the long term accumulated operating time and the short term single run duration provide valuable information about the condition of the machine and device. The information can be co-related to other process data to provide diagnoses for the process where the machine or device is applied.
Page 909: Mdsopt Monitored Data
2NGA002468 A Supervision functions Table 994: MDSOPT Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Initial value 0...299999 Initial value for op- eration time super- vision Operating time 0...23 Time of day when hour alarm and warning will occur Operating time 1=Immediate...
Page 910: Msvpr Identification
Supervision functions 2NGA002468 A Three-phase remanent undervoltage supervision MSVPR (ANSI 27R) 6.4.1 MSVPR Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase remanent undervolt- MSVPR 3U<R age supervision 6.4.2 MSVPR Function block Figure 470: MSVPR Function block 6.4.3 MSVPR Functionality The three-phase remanent undervoltage supervision function MSVPR is used to...
Page 911: Msvpr Operation Principle
2NGA002468 A Supervision functions Table 999: Special conditions Condition Description U3P connected to real measurements The function can work with one voltage chan- Phase supervision is set nel connected when to "A or AB", "B or BC" or "C or CA". The function requires that all three voltage Phase supervision channels are connected if...
Page 912: Msvpr Application
Supervision functions 2NGA002468 A Phase supervision Value of Functionality If the measured voltage of the supervised phase is lower Start value setting, Level detector than the set value of the enables the Timer module. 7 = A&B&C or AB&BC&CA This selection implements three-phase voltage supervision. The measured voltage of three supervised phases is com- Start value setting.
Page 913: Signals
2NGA002468 A Supervision functions Incoming Feeder1 (primary source) Incoming Feeder2 (backup source) Measurement Bus1 Bus2 Measurement Control logic MSVPR Outgoing Feeder1 Figure 472: Example of remanent voltage supervision before fault CB1 is tripped when a fault occurs on incoming Feeder1. MSVPR gives permission to control logic when the remanent voltage of the motor reaches a safe level on Bus1.
Page 914: Msvpr Settings
Supervision functions 2NGA002468 A 6.4.7.1 MSVPR Input signals Table 1001: MSVPR Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase voltages BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode 6.4.7.2 MSVPR Output signals Table 1002: MSVPR Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 915: Msvpr Technical Data
2NGA002468 A Supervision functions Table 1005: MSVPR Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description U_AMPL_A FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 Remanent voltage of phase A U_AMPL_B FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 Remanent voltage of phase B U_AMPL_C FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 Remanent voltage of phase C U_AMPL_AB FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 Remanent voltage of...
Page 916: Phsvpr Identification
Supervision functions 2NGA002468 A 6.5.1 PHSVPR Identification Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Voltage presence PHSVPR PHSVPR PHSVPR 6.5.2 PHSVPR Function block PHSVPR1 U_A_AB U_LIVE U_B_BC U_DEAD U_C_CA U_A_AB_LIVE BLOCK U_B_BC_LIVE U_C_CA_LIVE U_A_AB_DEAD U_B_BC_DEAD U_C_CA_DEAD Figure 474: PHSVPR Function block 6.5.3 PHSVPR Functionality...
Page 917 2NGA002468 A Supervision functions Figure 475: Functional module diagram Voltage detector This module supervises voltage presence status value of a load switch or a circuit Voltage selection setting is used for selecting the phase-to-earth or breaker. The Phase supervision setting phase-to-phase voltages for voltage detection, and the defines which phase or phases are monitored.
Page 918: Phsvpr Application
Supervision functions 2NGA002468 A Phase selection logic Num of phases matches the General output U_LIVE is activated when setting number of phases where voltage is set above high level setting. U_LIVE output is deactivated immediately after voltage live condition is no longer met. Num of phases matches the General output U_DEAD is activated when setting number of phases where voltage is below the set low level setting.
Page 919: Phsvpr Settings
2NGA002468 A Supervision functions 6.5.6 PHSVPR Signals Table 1008: PHSVPR Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase voltages BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode Table 1009: PHSVPR Output signals Name Type Description U_LIVE BOOLEAN Indicate high voltage presence U_A_AB_LIVE BOOLEAN Indicate high phase to earth voltage A or phase to...
Page 920: Phsvpr Monitored Data
Supervision functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 5=A&C or AB&CA 6=B&C or BC&CA 7=A&B&C or AB&BC&CA Num of phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of pha- ses required for 2=2 out of 3 voltage supervi- 3=3 out of 3 sion...
Page 921 2NGA002468 A Supervision functions 6.5.9 PHSVPR Technical data Table 1013: PHSVPR Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured voltage: f ±2 ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Operation time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 922: Condition Monitoring Functions
Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR (ANSI 52CM) 7.1.1 SSCBR Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Circuit-breaker condition monitor- SSCBR CBCM 52CM 7.1.2 SSCBR Function block Figure 477: SSCBR Function block 7.1.3 SSCBR Functionality The circuit-breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor...
Page 923: Sscbr Analog Input Configuration
2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions 7.1.4 SSCBR Analog input configuration SSCBR has one analog group input which must be properly configured. Table 1014: Analog inputs Input Description Three-phase currents See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources.
Page 924 Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A POSCLOSE OPENPOS POSOPEN Circuit CLOSEPOS breaker status INVALIDPOS Operation MON_ALM monitoring BLOCK RST_TRV_T TRV_T_OP_ALM Breaker contact OPEN_CB_EXE travel time TRV_T_CL_ALM CLOSE_CB_EXE OPR_ALM Operation counter OPR_LO IPOW_ALM Accumula- ted energy IPOW_LO RST_IPOW Breaker CB_LIFE_ALM life time RST_CB_WEAR RST_SPR_T Spring...
Page 925 2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions Figure 479: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status Phase current check Acc stop current . If This module compares the three phase currents to the setting the current in a phase exceeds the set level, information about the phase is reported to the contact position indicator module.
Page 926 Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A Inactivity timer The module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained inactive, that is, has stayed in the same open or closed state. The calculation is done by monitoring the states of the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts. The inactive days INA_DAYS is available in the monitored data view.
Page 927 2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions Figure 482: Travel time calculation when Travel time Clc mode is “From Pos to Pos” There is a time difference t between the start of the main contact opening and the opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time gap t between the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is completely open.
Page 928 Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A There is a time difference t between the start of the main contact opening and the OPEN_CB_EXE command. Similarly, there is a time gap t between the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is completely open. Therefore, to incorporate the times t and t , a correction factor needs to be added...
Page 929 2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions The binary outputs OPR_LO and OPR_ALM are deactivated when the BLOCK input is activated. 7.1.5.5 SSCBR Accumulation of I y t Accumulation of the I t module calculates the accumulated energy. The operation of the module can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 930 Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A CB accum. currents power setting to true in the Clear Page by setting the parameter under Device menu from WHMI or clear menu from LHMI. Alarm limit check The IPOW_ALM alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the value Alm Acc currents Pwr threshold setting.
Page 931 2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions (Equation 147) (Equation 148) The remaining life is calculated separately for all three phases and it is available as a monitored data value CB_LIFE_A (_B,_C). The values can be cleared by setting the parameter CB wear values in the Clear Page under Device menu from WHMI or clear menu from LHMI.
Page 932: Sscbr Application
Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A The spring charging time T_SPR_CHR is available in the monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications. Alarm limit check Spring If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the charge time setting, the subfunction generates the SPR_CHR_ALM alarm.
Page 933 2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions Circuit breaker status Circuit breaker status monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that is, whether the breaker is in an open, closed or intermediate position. Circuit breaker operation monitoring The purpose of the circuit breaker operation monitoring is to indicate that the circuit breaker has not been operated for a long time.
Page 934: Signals
Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 490: Trip Curves for a typical 12 kV, 630 A, 16 kA vacuum interrupter the number of closing-opening operations allowed for the circuit breaker the current at the time of tripping of the circuit breaker Calculation for estimating the remaining life Figure 490 shows that there are 30,000 possible operations at the rated operating...
Page 935 2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions 7.1.7 Signals 7.1.7.1 SSCBR Input signals Table 1015: SSCBR Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block input status POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for open po- sition of apparatus from I/O POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False...
Page 936: Sscbr Settings
Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A 7.1.7.2 SSCBR Output signals Table 1016: SSCBR Output signals Name Type Description TRV_T_OP_ALM BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value TRV_T_CL_ALM BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value SPR_CHR_ALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value OPR_ALM BOOLEAN...
Page 937: Condition Monitoring Functions
2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Alarm Op number 0...99999 Alarm limit for number of opera- tions Lockout Op num- 0...99999 Lock out limit for number of opera- tions Current exponent 0.00...5.00 0.01 2.00 Current exponent setting for energy calculation...
Page 938: Sscbr Monitored Data
Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A 7.1.9 SSCBR Monitored data Table 1019: SSCBR Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description T_TRV_OP FLOAT32 0...60000 Travel time of the CB during opening opera- tion T_TRV_CL FLOAT32 0...60000 Travel time of the CB during closing opera- tion T_SPR_CHR...
Page 939: Circuit-Breaker Condition Monitoring, Single Phase Spscbr (Ansi 52Cm)
2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions 7.1.11 SSCBR Technical revision history Table 1021: SSCBR Technical revision history Product Technical Change connectivi revision ty level PCL1 Internal improvement Circuit-breaker condition monitoring, single phase SPSCBR (ANSI 52CM) 7.2.1 SPSCBR Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification...
Page 940: Spscbr Operation Principle
Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A 7.2.3 SPSCBR Functionality The circuit breaker condition monitoring function 52CM is used to monitor different parameters of the circuit breaker. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of operations has reached a predefined value. For proper functioning of the circuit breaker, it is essential to monitor the circuit breaker operation, spring charge indication, breaker wear, travel time, number of operation cycles and accumulated energy.
Page 941 2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions OPENPOS_A POSCLOSE_A OPENPOS_B POSCLOSE_B OPENPOS_C POSCLOSE_C CLOSEPOS_A Circuit POSOPEN_A CLOSEPOS_B breaker POSOPEN_B CLOSEPOS_C status POSOPEN_C INVALIDPOS_A INVALIDPOS_B INVALIDPOS_C Operation MON_ALM monitoring BLOCK TRV_T_OP_ALM Breaker RST_TRV_T contakt travel time TRV_T_CL_ALM OPR_ALM Operation counter OPR_LO RST_IPOW IPOW_ALM Accumalated energy IPOW_LO...
Page 942 Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A 7.2.4.1 SSCBR Circuit breaker status The Circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that is, whether the breaker is in open, closed or intermediate position. The operation of the breaker status monitoring can be described by using a module diagram.
Page 943 2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions POSCLOSE_A Inactivity timer (A) POSOPEN_A POSCLOSE_B Inactivity Alarm limit MON_ALM timer (B) check POSOPEN_B POSCLOSE_C Inactivity timer (C) POSOPEN_C BLOCK Figure 494: Functional module diagram for calculating inactive days and alarm for circuit breaker operation monitoring Inactivity timer The module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained inactive, that is, has stayed in the same open or closed state.
Page 944 Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A Traveling POSCLOSE_A time (A) POSOPEN_A calculator Traveling POSCLOSE_B TRV_T_CL_ALM Alarm limit time (B) check POSOPEN_B TRV_T_CL_ALM calculator Traveling POSCLOSE_C time (C) POSOPEN_C calculator RST_TRV_T BLOCK Figure 495: Functional module diagram for breaker contact travel time Traveling time calculator The contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between auxiliary contacts' state change.
Page 945 2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions Opening time Cor (= t added with the ) setting. The closing time is calculated Closing time Cor (t by adding the value set with the ) setting to the measured closing time. The last measured opening travel time T_TRV_OP_A(_B,_C) and the closing travel time T_TRV_CL_A(_B,_C) are available through the Monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications.
Page 946 Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A The number of operations NO_OPR is available through the Monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications. The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be taken into use by writing the value to the parameter and in the Clear Page under Device menu from WHMI or clear menu from LHMI.
Page 947 2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions Main Contact Main Contact close close open open POSCLOSE_A POSCLOSE_A Energy Energy accumulation starts accumulation starts Difference Cor time Difference Cor time (Negative) (Positive) Figure 499: Significance of the Difference Cor time setting Difference Cor time setting is used instead of the auxiliary contact to accumulate the energy from the time the main contact opens.
Page 948 Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A POSCLOSE_A CB life estimator (A) POSCLOSE_B Alarm limit CB life CB_LIFE_ALM check estimator (B) POSCLOSE_C CB life estimator (C) RST_CB_WEAR BLOCK Figure 500: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit breaker Circuit breaker life estimator The circuit breaker life estimator module calculates the remaining life of the circuit breaker.
Page 949 2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions 7.2.4.7 SPSCBR Circuit breaker spring-charged indication The circuit breaker spring-charged indication subfunction calculates the spring charging time. This subfunction is not applicable to magnetic actuators. The operation of the subfunction can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 950: Spscbr Application
Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 502: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure alarm The gas pressure is monitored through the binary input signals PRES_LO_IN and PRES_ALM_IN. Timer 1 When the PRES_ALM_IN binary input is activated, the PRES_ALM alarm is activated Pressure alarm time setting.
Page 951 2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions contact B opens, the auxiliary contact A closes and the main contact reaches its closed position. The travel times are calculated based on the state changes of the auxiliary contacts and the adding correction factor to consider the time difference of the main contact's and the auxiliary contact's position change.
Page 952 Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A Figure 503: Trip Curves for a typical 12 kV, 630 A, 16 kA vacuum interrupter the number of closing-opening operations allowed for the circuit breaker the current at the time of tripping of the circuit breaker Calculation of Directional Coefficient The directional coefficient is calculated according to the formula: (Equation 149)
Page 953: Signals
2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions by 30,000/60=500 operations. If the remaining life of the circuit breaker is 15,000 operations prior to this tripping, after one operation of 10 kA, the remaining life of the circuit breaker is 15,000-500=14,500 at the rated operating current. Breaker life reduction for one operation at current level I can also be estimated by the following formula, (Equation 150)
Page 954 Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Default Description POSCLOSE_B BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for close po- sition of apparatus from I/O, phase B POSCLOSE_C BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for close po- sition of apparatus from I/O, phase C PRES_ALM_IN BOOLEAN 0=False Binary pressure alarm input PRES_LO_IN...
Page 955: Spscbr Settings
2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions Name Type Description CB_LIFE_ALM BOOLEAN Remaining life of CB excee- ded alarm limit MON_ALM BOOLEAN CB 'not operated for long time' alarm PRES_ALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level PRES_LO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level OPENPOS_A BOOLEAN CB is in open position, phase OPENPOS_B...
Page 956 Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Alarm Op number 0...9999 Alarm limit for number of opera- tions Lockout Op num- 0...9999 Lock out limit for number of opera- tions Current exponent 0.00...2.00 0.01 2.00 Current exponent setting for energy calculation...
Page 957: Spscbr Monitored Data
2NGA002468 A Condition monitoring functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Ini Acc Curr Pwr A 0.00...20000.00 0.01 0.00 Phase A initial val- ue for accumulation energy (Iyt) Ini Acc Curr Pwr B 0.00...20000.00 0.01 0.00 Phase B initial val- ue for accumulation energy (Iyt) Ini Acc Curr Pwr C...
Page 958: Spscbr Technical Data
Condition monitoring functions 2NGA002468 A Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description INA_DAYS_B INT32 0...9999 The number of days CB has been inactive, phase B INA_DAYS_C INT32 0...9999 The number of days CB has been inactive, phase C CB_LIFE_A INT32 -9999...9999 CB Remaining life phase CB_LIFE_B INT32...
Page 959: Measurement Functions
2NGA002468 A Measurement functions Measurement functions Basic measurements 8.1.1 Measurement functions The three-phase current measurement function CMMXU is used for monitoring and metering the phase currents of the power system. The three-phase voltage measurement function VMMXU is used for monitoring and metering the phase-to-phase voltages of the power system.
Page 960 Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A Some of the measurement functions operate on two alternative measurement modes: "DFT" and "RMS". The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode setting. Depending on the measuring function if the measurement mode cannot be selected, the measuring mode is "DFT". Demand value calculation The demand values are calculated separately in each measurement function and per phase when applicable.
Page 961 2NGA002468 A Measurement functions limit value supervision. It is possible to prevent too quick changes by adjusting the change detection interval for GOOSE sending. By default, interval is 500 ms, but it can be set to any value between 50-1000 ms. GSELPRT1 must be added to ACT sheet to make this setting available in menu location Configuration >...
Page 962 Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A Off delay time setting is applied when the measured value enters a range, while the exits a range. Figure 504: The effect of On delay time (0 ms) and Off delay time (1000 ms) settings on the range value reporting, as well as warning and alarm outputs Functions with limit value supervision also have small fixed hystereses to prevent small fluctuations near the limits from causing repeated changes to the X_RANGE On delay time and Off delay time are set to zero .
Page 963 2NGA002468 A Measurement functions Function Parameter V low limit V high high limit V low low limit On delay time Off delay time Phase voltage measurement (VPHMMXU) Num of phases V high limit V low limit V high high limit V low low limit On delay time Off delay time...
Page 964 Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A Function Parameter Zro A low limit Zro A low low Lim Ps Seq A on delay time Ng Seq A on delay time Zro A on delay time Ps Seq A off delay time Ng Seq A off delay time Zro A off delay time Phase sequence voltage measurement (VSMSQI) Ps Seq V high limit...
Page 965 2NGA002468 A Measurement functions Figure 505: Integral deadband supervision The deadband value used in the integral calculation is configured with the deadband setting. The value represents the percentage of the difference between the maximum and minimum limit in the units of 0.001 percent x seconds. The reporting delay of the integral algorithms in seconds is calculated with the (max −...
Page 966 Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A Function Parameter Minimum/maximum Residual current measurement (RESCMMXU) A deadband res 0.04/40 Residual voltage measurement (RESVMMXU) V deadband res 0.004/4 Frequency measurement (FMMXU) F deadband 0.04/40 Phase sequence current measurement Ps Seq A deadband, 0.04/40 (CSMSQI) Ng Seq A deadband, Zro A deadband Phase sequence voltage measurement Ps Seq V deadband,...
Page 967 2NGA002468 A Measurement functions Measurement mode setting Power calculation values Pos Seq = ⋅ ⋅ (Equation 154) PhsAB ⋅ − (Equation 155) PhsBC ⋅ − (Equation 156) PhsCA ⋅ − (Equation 157) PhsA = ⋅ ⋅ (Equation 158) PhsB = ⋅ ⋅...
Page 968 Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A (Equation 164) The calculated powers are available as function outputs S_INST, P_INST, Q_INST and the power factor as PF_INST. Depending on the unit multiplier selected with Power unit Mult , the calculated power values in the monitored data and measurement view are presented in units of kVA/kW/kVAr or in units of MVA/MW/MVAr.
Page 969: Measurement Function Applications
2NGA002468 A Measurement functions When the energy counter reaches its defined maximum value, the counter value is Energy unit Mult setting reset and restarted from zero. Changing the value of the resets the accumulated energy values to the initial values, that is, EA_FWD_ACM Forward Wh Initial , EA_RV_ACM to Reverse Wh Initial , ER_FWD_ACM to Forward VArh Initial and ER_RV_ACM to Reverse VArh Initial .
Page 970 Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A 8.1.4.1 CMMXU Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase current measurement CMMXU IA, IB, IC 8.1.4.2 CMMXU Function block Figure 507: CMMXU Function block 8.1.4.3 CMMXU Functionality The three-phase current measurement function CMMXU provides limit value supervision output (HIGH_ALARM, HIGH_WARN, LOW_WARN, LOW_ALARM).
Page 971 2NGA002468 A Measurement functions blocks in this document. The configuration can be written to the protection relay once the mismatch is corrected. 8.1.4.5 Signals CMMXU Input signals Table 1034: CMMXU Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all bi-...
Page 972 Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description A high high limit 0.00...40.00 0.01 1.40 High alarm current limit A high limit 0.00...40.00 0.01 1.20 High warning cur- rent limit A low limit 0.00...40.00 0.01 0.00 Low warning cur- rent limit A low low limit 0.00...40.00...
Page 973 2NGA002468 A Measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Time min demand IL2 Timestamp Time of minimum de- mand phase B Time min demand IL3 Timestamp Time of minimum de- mand phase C BLOCK BOOLEAN Block signal for all bina- 0=False ry outputs 1=True...
Page 974: Three-Phase Voltage Measurement Vmmxu (Ansi Va, Vb, Vc)
Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A 8.1.4.8 CMMXU Technical data Table 1039: CMMXU Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz ±0.5 % or ±0.002 × I (at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 × I Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n ×...
Page 975 2NGA002468 A Measurement functions 8.1.5.2 VMMXU Function block Figure 508: VMMXU Function block 8.1.5.3 VMMXU Functionality The three-phase voltage measurement function VMMXU provides limit value supervision output (HIGH_ALARM, HIGH_WARN, LOW_WARN, LOW_ALARM). Setting On delay time and Off delay time are used for controlling the activation parameters and the deactivation of alarm and warning outputs.
Page 976 Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A Table 1042: Special conditions Condition Description U3P connected to SMV or analog measure- The function can work with one voltage chan- Num of start phases is set ments nel connected if to "1 out of 3". Otherwise, at least two vol- tages must be connected (third one will be derived).
Page 977 2NGA002468 A Measurement functions Name Type Description U_DMD_AB FLOAT32 Demand value of U12 voltage U_DMD_BC FLOAT32 Demand value of U23 voltage U_DMD_CA FLOAT32 Demand value of U31 voltage U_DMD_A FLOAT32 Demand value of UL1 voltage U_DMD_B FLOAT32 Demand value of UL2 voltage U_DMD_C FLOAT32 Demand value of UL3 voltage...
Page 978 Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A Table 1047: VMMXU Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description U12-kV:1 FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Measured phase to phase voltage ampli- tude phase AB U23-kV:1 FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Measured phase to phase voltage ampli- tude phase BC U31-kV:1 FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Measured phase to...
Page 979 2NGA002468 A Measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description 4=low-low U_INST_CA FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 U31 amplitude, magni- tude of instantaneous value U_ANGL_CA FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 U31 angle U_DB_CA FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 U31 amplitude, magni- tude of deadband value U_DMD_CA FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Demand value of U31 voltage U_RANGE_CA Enum...
Page 980 Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A 8.1.5.9 VMMXU Technical revision history Table 1049: VMMXU Technical revision history Product Technical Change connectivi revision ty level PCL1 Internal improvement REC615 Technical Manual...
Page 981: Phase Voltage Measurement Vphmmxu (Ansi Vl)
2NGA002468 A Measurement functions 8.1.6 Phase voltage measurement VPHMMXU (ANSI VL) 8.1.6.1 VPHMMXU Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Phase voltage measurement VPHMMXU 8.1.6.2 VPHMMXU Function block Figure 509: VPHMMXU Function block 8.1.6.3 VPHMMXU Functionality The phase voltage measurement function VPHMMXU provides limit value supervision output (HIGH_ALARM, HIGH_WARN, LOW_WARN and LOW_ALARM).
Page 982 Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. There are a few special conditions which must be noted with the configuration. Table 1051: Special conditions Condition Description U3P connected to SMV or analog measure- The function requires that at least one volt- Num of start pha- ments...
Page 983 2NGA002468 A Measurement functions Name Type Description U_INST_B FLOAT32 Phase B voltage instantane- ous value amplitude in kV U_INST_C FLOAT32 Phase C voltage instantane- ous value amplitude in kV U_DMD_A FLOAT32 Demand value of UL1 voltage U_DMD_B FLOAT32 Demand value of UL2 voltage U_DMD_C FLOAT32 Demand value of UL3 voltage...
Page 984 Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A Table 1056: VPHMMXU Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description UL1PH-kV:1 FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 Measured phase to neu- tral voltage phase A UL2PH-kV:1 FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 Measured phase to neu- tral voltage phase B UL3PH-kV:1 FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 Measured phase to neu- tral voltage phase C BLOCK...
Page 985 2NGA002468 A Measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description U_DMD_C FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 Demand value of UL3 voltage U_RANGE_C Enum UL3 amplitude range 0=normal 1=high 2=low 3=high-high 4=low-low 8.1.6.8 VPHMMXU Technical data Table 1057: VPHMMXU Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured: f ±2 Hz...
Page 986: Single-Phase Voltage Measurement Vammxu (Ansi V_A)
Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A 8.1.7 Single-phase voltage measurement VAMMXU (ANSI V_A) 8.1.7.1 VAMMXU Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Single-phase voltage measurement VAMMXU 8.1.7.2 VAMMXU Function block Figure 510: VAMMXU Function block 8.1.7.3 VAMMXU Functionality The single-phase voltage measurement function VAMMXU provides limit value supervision output (HIGH_ALARM, HIGH_WARN, LOW_WARN, LOW_ALARM).
Page 987 2NGA002468 A Measurement functions Table 1060: Special conditions Condition Description U3P connected to SMV or analog measure- The function requires that the first phase ments voltage U_A or U_AB is connected. Improper analog channel configuration causes a validation error if the analog channels are not completely configured or they do not match with certain settings.
Page 988 Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description V low limit 0.00...4.00 0.01 0.00 Low warning volt- age limit V low low limit 0.00...4.00 0.01 0.00 Low alarm voltage limit V deadband 100...100000 10000 Deadband configu- ration value for in- tegral calculation.
Page 989: Residual Current Measurement Rescmmxu (Ansi Ig)
2NGA002468 A Measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description U_INST_A FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 UL1 Amplitude, magni- tude of instantaneous value U_ANGL_A FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 UL1 angle U_DB_A FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 UL1 Amplitude, magni- tude of deadband value U_DMD_A FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 Demand value of UL1 voltage U_RANGE_A Enum...
Page 990 Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A 8.1.8.2 RESCMMXU Function block Figure 511: RESCMMXU Function block 8.1.8.3 RESCMMXU Functionality The residual current measurement function RESCMMXU provides limit value On delay time supervision output (HIGH_ALARM, HIGH_WARN). Setting parameters Off delay time are used for controlling the activation and, respectively, the deactivation of alarm and warning outputs.
Page 991 2NGA002468 A Measurement functions RESCMMXU Input signals Table 1069: RESCMMXU Input signals Name Type Default Description IRES SIGNAL Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all bi- nary outputs RESCMMXU Output signals Table 1070: RESCMMXU Output signals Name Type Description HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN...
Page 992 Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A 8.1.8.7 RESCMMXU Monitored data Table 1073: RESCMMXU Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Io-A:1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN Block signal for all bina- 0=False ry outputs 1=True HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN High alarm 0=False 1=True HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN...
Page 993: Residual Voltage Measurement Resvmmxu (Ansi Vg/Vn)
2NGA002468 A Measurement functions 8.1.8.9 RESCMMXU Technical revision history Table 1075: RESCMMXU Technical revision history Product Technical Change connectivi revision ty level PCL1 Internal improvement 8.1.9 Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU (ANSI VG/VN) 8.1.9.1 RESVMMXU Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification...
Page 994 Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. There are a few special conditions which must be noted with the configuration. Table 1077: Special conditions Condition Description URES calculated The function requires that all three voltage channels are connected to calculate residu- VT connection must be al voltage.
Page 995 2NGA002468 A Measurement functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 5=off V Hi high limit res 0.00...4.00 0.01 0.20 High alarm voltage limit V high limit res 0.00...4.00 0.01 0.05 High warning volt- age limit V deadband res 100...100000 10000 Deadband configu- ration value for in-...
Page 996: Frequency Measurement Fmmxu (Ansi F)
Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A 8.1.9.8 RESVMMXU Technical data Table 1083: RESVMMXU Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured voltage: f/f = ±2 Hz ±0.5 % or ±0.002 × U Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × f , where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…...
Page 997 2NGA002468 A Measurement functions When the frequencies cannot be measured, for example, due to too low voltage amplitude, the default value for frequency measurement can be selected with the Def frequency Sel setting parameter. In the “Nominal” mode the frequency is set to 50 Hz (or 60 Hz) and in “Zero”...
Page 998: Sequence Current Measurement Csmsqi (Ansi I1, I2, I0)
Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A 8.1.10.6 FMMXU Monitored data Table 1089: FMMXU Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description f-Hz:1 FLOAT32 35.00...75.00 Measured frequency F_INST FLOAT32 35.00...75.00 Frequency, instantane- ous value F_DB FLOAT32 35.00...75.00 Frequency, deadband value F_RANGE Enum Measured frequency 0=normal range 1=high...
Page 999 2NGA002468 A Measurement functions 8.1.11.2 CSMSQI Function block Figure 514: CSMSQI Function block 8.1.11.3 CSMSQI Functionality The sequence current measurement function CSMSQI provides limit value supervision outputs (I2_HIGH_AL, I2_HIGH_WARN, I1_HIGH_AL, I1_HIGH_WARN, I1_LOW_WRN, I1_LOW_AL, I0_HIGH_AL, I0_HIGH_WARN). Ps Seq A on delay time, Ps Seq A off delay time, Ng Seq A on Setting parameters delay time, Ng Seq A off delay time, Zro Seq A on delay time, and Zro Seq A off delay time are used for controlling the activation and the deactivation of alarm and...
Page 1000 Measurement functions 2NGA002468 A CSMSQI Input signals Table 1093: CSMSQI Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents CSMSQI Output signals Table 1094: CSMSQI Output signals Name Type Description I2_HIGH_AL BOOLEAN Negative sequence high alarm I2_HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN Negative sequence high warning I1_HIGH_AL BOOLEAN...
Page 1001 2NGA002468 A Measurement functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description itive sequence cur- rent Ps Seq A low low 0.00...40.00 0.01 0.00 Low alarm current limit for positive sequence current Ps Seq A deadband 100...100000 2500 Deadband configu- ration value for positive sequence current for inte- gral calculation.